JP7627090B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

In this type of gaming machine, for example, there is one that makes it possible to execute an effect similar to that of moving a movable body as a structure by displaying a pseudo-movable body display in a moving manner (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-92949 A

Unlike the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above, the pseudo-movable body is simply displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and there was a problem in that it was not possible to enhance the entertainment value of the presentation.

The present invention has been made in consideration of such problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the simulated moving body display.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A vibration effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
A light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light in response to the predetermined vibration effect;
An effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of a game;
a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect,
The predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect have different aspects,
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
Before the special effect is executed, a special effect different from the special effect can be executed;
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be moved during the special effects and the special effects,
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the second display position;
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden;
The pseudo movable body display includes a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display having a different aspect from the first pseudo movable body display.
It is characterized by the following.
Furthermore, (1) in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player, and includes an operation means (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates, which executes a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern). a vibration control means for executing a vibration effect (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 for executing a performance process during variable display in step S172 using vibration control data of an operation unit performance control pattern or a variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203), and a light emission effect execution means for executing a light emission effect (e.g., light emission of a lever lamp 9B1 and a button lamp 9B2 with a light emission color included in an operation unit performance pattern) that causes the operation unit to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect (e.g., light emission during variable display in step S172 using lamp control data of an operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203). and a specific performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 for executing performance processing in accordance with the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing specific performances (e.g., a reach performance of SP Reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 for executing performance processing during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203), and the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit performance pattern, etc.) when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed, and The proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the constant vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation unit performance pattern, etc.), the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.),
A predetermined vibration effect can be executed at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state,
moreover,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of (A) below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing effects using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in JP 2019-92949 A, and capable of executing effects similar to effects in which a movable body as a structure is moved by displaying and moving a pseudo-movable body display. However, such gaming machines have a problem in that they only display and move a pseudo-movable body in the same way as a movable body, and are unable to enhance the interest of the effects. In light of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the pseudo-movable body display.

The gaming machine described in the means (A) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance in a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation.

The invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention, or it may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol determination process. A figure showing an example of settings for the setting suggestion performance execution decision table. A figure showing configuration examples and setting examples regarding setting suggestion patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. A diagram showing an example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. A front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic portion 10SH. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of a jackpot. A figure showing an example of the execution timing and duration of vibration effects and visual guidance effects. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance device for characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. A figure showing an example of settings when executing an operation unit performance pattern and a specific linked performance. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing settings of vibration patterns. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of performance using vibration and light emission. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting a continuous performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting the timing at which an operation unit performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. A figure showing an example of the execution of a presentation in which a game effect lamp is illuminated. A figure showing an example of setting a performance period during which a specific linked performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of music playback execution. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 241SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic section 241SG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern. A diagram showing the execution periods of various effects in normal reaches and super reaches. This is a diagram to explain the content and configuration of various effects in Super Reach. This shows the expected probability of a jackpot depending on the execution status of development effects A and B. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development process of a pachinko gaming machine. 1A is a diagram showing a manner in which the mounted movable body moves, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. 1A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. 13A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. 1A is a diagram showing the movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13A is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the preview performance type determination process. 1A is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance A. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of development suggestion effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of development suggestion effect. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance B, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for determining the type of final effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of final effect. (A) to (H) are figures showing examples of the performance operations of Super Reach β, mainly in normal reaches. (A) to (J) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly in weak super reaches. (A) to (F) are figures showing examples of the performance operations in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly during strong super reaches. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance operations of strong super reach performances. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of presentation operations after a confirmed jackpot is announced. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED. FIG. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display. FIG. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13H are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a third modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) is provided that is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning slots (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the second start winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning slots (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 may display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source of 100V AC, such as a commercial power source, can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12, via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it diagnoses abnormalities in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the hit judgment value range from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of big hit judgment values that changes depending on each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of the features related to the setting suggestion production)
Hereinafter, a description will be given of a characteristic feature relating to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this characteristic feature, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate can be executed while the variable display is being executed.

Figure 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting processing, a stop pattern determination processing is executed (step S201). In the stop pattern determination processing, a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative patterns, such as the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns, is determined. Following the stop pattern determination processing, a preview performance determination processing is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination processing makes it possible to determine the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special chart change performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling the execution of various performances. For example, one of the multiple prepared special chart change performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command. Also, one of the multiple prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. Note that the special chart change performance control pattern and the preview performance control pattern are not limited to being set as separate performance control patterns, and one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings for each performance may be set.

When the performance control pattern is determined in step S203, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, for example (step S204). Also, settings are made to start the variation of the decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control section 123, and the variation of the decorative patterns can be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (consumed), and the pending displays in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4", etc. are moved (shifted) one by one to the left. This shifts the pending display. In the active display part provided on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display corresponding to the pending display erased (consumed) in the pending display area may be performed. Note that when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second start winning, the setting for updating the active display in the active display area may be performed without updating the pending display. After that, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the performance process during the variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stopping symbol determination process. In the stopping symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed (step S221). Whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed can be determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the reach performance of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop pattern in the case of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop pattern determination process is terminated. In the case of non-reach, the variable display result is "miss". In the case of normal reach, the variable display result may be "jackpot" or may be "miss". In the case of non-reach, where the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not a reach state, the final stop pattern is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination. The final stop pattern in the case of non-reach is determined to be different (mismatched) decorative patterns in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. In the case of normal reach, where the variable display result is "miss", the final stop pattern in the case of reach miss is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a missed reach is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In the event of a normal reach where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is the confirmed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop pattern at the time of the super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of the super reach, the variable display result may be either a "jackpot" or a "miss." At the time of the super reach where the variable display result is a "miss," the final stop pattern at the time of the reach miss is the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. At the time of the jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the jackpot.

During a super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed as fixed decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such a reach miss combination or a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbols that can be determined as reach symbols may include multiple types of decorative symbols, such as seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers may be only performance images showing the numbers, or may be performance images showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol may be determined to be one of multiple decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol. The numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative symbols that become the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol decreases as the numbers become 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the lowest. In contrast, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol increases as the numbers become 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the highest. In this determination ratio setting, when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, and as the numbers 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2 are displayed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state decreases, and when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. In addition, in the reach pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "jackpot", the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be the same. The number of judgment values assigned to each decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be different, or the number of judgment values assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern. The determination ratio of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may differ depending on the type of jackpot.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop pattern determination process is terminated. If the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (step S225). The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect, by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, or "effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the result of the determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226). If "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is not executed (step S226; No), the process of determining the symbols to be stopped is terminated. If "effect" has been determined (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is identified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and stores the notified setting value in a specified area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 is identified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and the stopping symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern may be determined to be one of a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, for example, by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in ROM 121, based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122.

Figure 10-3 shows an example of a setting for the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, in ROM 121, table data constituting the decision table TA01 shown in Figure 10-3 is prestored as the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the decision table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "presentation" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "miss". With such a determination ratio setting, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot."

Figure 10-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as multiple setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether the symbol display color is changed and, if changed, the display color. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold in addition to the normal display color red. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the expectation level is low, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting that the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to give suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on whether the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

Figure 10-4 (B) shows an example of settings for the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in Figure 10-4 (B) is stored in advance in the ROM 121 as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stopping symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11, etc. In the determination table TA11, there are portions where the number of judgment values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion effect using a reach pattern is executed, the reach pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so there is a high probability of control to a jackpot game state. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is high, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, the reach pattern when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode includes a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, and a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, and also suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In the case where the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed to continue giving a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state and also giving a suggestion regarding the setting value.

The setting suggestion presentation can be executed so that the presentation mode differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, and the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to copper, or not, differs. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, and the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to gold, or not, differs.

Instead of or in addition to changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect may be to change any aspect of the reach state, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol. Alternatively, it may be to change the performance mode by any performance device, such as displaying a background image, an outer frame image, or any other performance image, outputting sound from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up decorative light-emitting bodies such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operating performance movable members, or a combination of some or all of these. The setting suggestion effect and other optional performances in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executable when any data related to performance control, any data not related to performance control, or a combination of these satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions previously determined for performance execution. A performance that changes the symbol display color is also called a change performance.

The multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and patterns that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 may be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is a "miss," whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is a "jackpot," and cannot be determined when the variable display result is a "miss." In this case, pattern RE-2 may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 may be determined at a different rate depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Figure 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing as the variable display performance processing. In the variable display performance processing, it is determined whether or not the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various performances as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting processing. These commands are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. This allows a variety of effects to be produced by a specified performance device, such as displaying a specified performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, outputting specified sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on, off, or blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable components for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step S242). If it is the advance notice performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the advance notice performance (step S243). If it is not the advance notice performance period (step S242; No) or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach performance period (step S244). If it is the reach performance period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach performance (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the reach performance is executed after the pattern display color is changed, it is possible to provide suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to provide suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1.

If it is not the reach performance period (step S244; No) or after the control of step S245 has been performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be determined in advance as a performance execution period in which the pattern display color is changed when a setting suggestion performance using a reach pattern is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No) or after the control of step S247 has been performed, control is performed to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern (step S248), and then the performance processing during variable display is terminated.

The change performance period may be set to a different time length depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change performance period may be set to the shortest first period, in the case of pattern RE-1, the change performance period may be set to the second period longer than the first period, in the case of pattern RE-2, the change performance period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change performance period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when a performance that notifies an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player tends to take an image or video of the performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player and post it on a member registration website such as a social networking service (SNS) or an Internet video supply site. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous performance is short, a problem occurs in that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for a performance (unfavorable performance) that is often performed even in unfavorable cases, there is a problem that a long execution period of the unfavorable performance gives a player a sense of discomfort because it does not stimulate the desire to take a photo. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to ensure time for shooting, and the execution period of unfavorable effects is shortened to reduce discomfort. This prevents the player from missing an advantageous effect when it is executed, and also ensures time for shooting. Furthermore, by ensuring time for shooting, the player can publish the captured images and videos on the Internet, which can increase public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in many cases, the images and videos are published, including which pachinko gaming machine 1 at which gaming parlor they were taken, which means that the gaming parlor is advertised by the player. In this way, by ensuring time for shooting when a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only for the player but also for the gaming parlor.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the pattern determination command has not been received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is terminated and standby is performed. In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, a predetermined error process may be executed in response to the fact that the pattern determination command could not be received normally. If a pattern determination command has been received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern (step S250). Next, a certain time that has been determined in advance is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). In addition, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S252), and then the variable display performance process is terminated.

Figure 10-6 shows an example of the execution of a setting suggestion effect. Figure 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. The decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and a reach is established, and a normal reach reach effect is executed. Figure 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which a normal reach reach effect transitions to a super reach reach effect, resulting in a reach development. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size on the display screen of the image display device 5, and an effect image in the super reach reach effect is displayed. Figure 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the reach symbol that is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, an effect image announcing a message such as "Change in symbol display color!!" is displayed, suggesting a change in the symbol display color.

Figure 10-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color. Figure 10-6 (D2) shows a performance execution example HD112 in which the pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper. Figure 10-6 (D3) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver. Figure 10-6 (D4) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold. In performance execution example HD111, the pattern RE-0 does not change the display color of the reach symbol, and it remains the normal display color red. In this way, a failure performance (false performance) in which the symbol display color does not change is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low. In performance execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the reach symbol to copper, suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 2 or higher. In performance execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the reach symbol to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation of a favorable set value. In performance execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the reach symbol to gold, suggesting that 6, the highest set value, has been confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect may be an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo consecutive effect or a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the probability of a jackpot and also suggests the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be an effect that can make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then continued, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then ended, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while continuing, or a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination rates depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, a suggestion is made in the presentation mode of a pattern that is determined with a high probability, thereby diversifying the presentation and increasing interest in the game so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state may be made, but no suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made in conjunction with the execution of the jackpot start performance (fanfare performance) or the performance during the jackpot (such as the performance corresponding to the first round or second round). There may also be cases where suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are made without making suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

(Description of characteristic portion 10SH)
Next, a characteristic feature 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH has an operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 has a push button 31B that the player can press to give a specific command.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a gaze guidance effect execution means capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 10SH has a higher expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a higher reliability of winning when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means of feature section 10SH can execute a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at either of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts and timing T2 when a reach is established, or at either of timing T3 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed after timing T1 and timing T2, and at timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether it is either timing T1 or timing T2, or either timing T3 or timing T4.

The visual line guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH does not execute visual line guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute visual line guidance effect at timing T1 and timing T2.

The visual guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to characteristic unit 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from a vibration effect and a visual guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach effect of a super reach.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is provided with a display means for displaying information. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 for displaying various performance images.

The display of the visual guidance effect related to characteristic part 10SH has a lower priority than the display of specified information, and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information. For example, the visual guidance effect image has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH, and shows the layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent material, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. With this configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

The push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate when driven by a vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is configured, for example, as an eccentric motor in which a weight with an offset center of gravity is attached to the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to provide a variety of vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L, 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions on the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided to the left of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided to the right of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L, 9R have multiple LEDs built in along the extension direction of the game effect lamps 9L, 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, turning on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lamps to be turned on/off. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a motor control board 130. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits that drive the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic part 10SH. The performance control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display to be executed and the display result of the variable display to be executed (step 10SHS1). The fluctuation pattern and display result are identified by the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when the variable display starts and analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to a combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, lottery refers to a method of determination using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The random number value uses one of the performance random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random number update process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). A vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect that is not linked to a preview effect. In the processing of step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect by drawing lots using random number values and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

In the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the decision value to be compared with the random number value should be assigned to the decision result of whether or not a vibration effect is to be performed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is to be performed, so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is performed than when the vibration effect is not performed, and the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is performed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is calculated, for example, as follows: (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") / {(probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is not a "jackpot")}.

Therefore, the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2 only needs to specify the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot" and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot" so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect will be a predetermined value.

(Vibration effects and jackpot reliability)
11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a plurality of types of vibration effects, which are execution patterns SE1 to SE10, according to a combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, or timing T2 when a reach is achieved. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved. Also, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. Also, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as vibration effects at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, which can increase interest.

In addition, regardless of whether it is timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, or timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as a vibration performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as a vibration performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors, regardless of when the vibration effect can be executed. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors.

In this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. Also, in this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot for the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result definitively indicates that a jackpot has been reached.

This configuration allows the user to focus on the color of the light emitted by the push button 31B when it vibrates, and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the timing of execution of the vibration effect. For example, even with the same type of vibration effect, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts than when it is executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of a normal reach is being executed. Also, even with the same type of vibration effect, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed than when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts.

This configuration can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. Also, if the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a specified reach state when no vibration effect is executed at timing T1, it can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, rather than at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed. And, when a vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, it can further heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed.

The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of normal reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the Super Reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of Super Reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of Super Reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the Super Reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of Super Reach reach performance.

With this configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed can be used as a chance-up effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the push button 31B is always vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors, and the display result is definitively notified that it is a "jackpot."

This configuration can increase the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, rather than at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In fact, when the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, it can further increase the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In this way, in this embodiment, the sense of expectation for the vibration effect to be executed can be changed in a complex manner as the display of the decorative patterns progresses.

In addition, by setting the probability of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to a sufficiently low probability compared to the probability of executing other vibration effects, it is possible to increase the excitement when it is definitively notified that the display result is a "jackpot."

In addition, in this embodiment, when push button 31B is vibrated to produce a vibration effect, push button 31B is always illuminated.

This configuration allows the user to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, increasing the chances that the user will recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation then determines, based on the result of the determination in step 10SHS2, whether or not to execute a vibration presentation at either timing T3 when the normal reach presentation is being executed, or timing T4 when the super reach presentation is being executed in the current variable display (step 10SHS3).

When a vibration effect is to be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach effect (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect (step 10SHS4). An eye-guiding effect is an effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect by drawing lots using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121. In the table referenced in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio for the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect is set regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect at the same ratio regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed this time.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, a gaze guidance effect can be executed.

This configuration allows the push button 31B to be noticed before the vibration effect is executed, thereby sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

On the other hand, if a vibration effect is executed at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the gaze guidance effect is not executed.

When the display result is derived and displayed, a "miss" display result may be displayed, and then a rescue effect may be executed, resulting in the true display result being derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and the current variable display has started, if a gaze guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, this may give the wrong impression that a rescue effect was executed in the previous variable display. In contrast, in this embodiment, a gaze guidance effect is not executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, thereby preventing such a misunderstanding.

In addition, if a visual guidance effect is executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state. In contrast, in this embodiment, a visual guidance effect is not executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, so that it is possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, if a vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach reach effect (step 10SHS3; No), or after executing the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as a reach effect, and the type of effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute various effects such as a preview effect, and the type of effect, by a lottery. At this time, the probability of winning is varied depending on whether or not a preview effect is executed and the type of effect, by varying the determination ratio in the lottery depending on the current display result and the current fluctuation pattern. Also, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern will be executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance that has been decided to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special chart fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern as the initial value for the performance control process timer, and stores in the timer value storage area of RAM 122 the performance specific data that specifies the type and mode of the performance that has been decided to be executed, and the execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the performance by comparing it with the timer value of the performance control process timer. If there are multiple performances that have been decided to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores the performance specific data and the execution timing specific timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start variable display of the decorative pattern in the manner specified by the current variation pattern and which derives the determined final stop pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Then, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration and gaze guidance effects)
11-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and duration of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts or the timing T2 when a reach is established. Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either the timing T3 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed or the timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

In addition, as described above, when the CPU 120 for controlling the effects executes a vibration effect at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a gaze guidance effect before that.

In this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T3 while a normal reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T3, and starts the vibration effect when timing T3 is reached. Similarly, in this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T4 while a super reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T4, and starts the vibration effect when timing T4 is reached. The presentation period for the gaze guidance effect in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the gaze guidance effect is being executed.

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Example of performance)
11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams showing examples of vibration effects and visual guidance effects. In these examples, a vibration effect is executed at timing T4 during the execution of the reach effect of a super reach.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach reach performances. In the reach performance of a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a background image 10SHY of a "mountain view" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the reach performance of the super reach begins, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped when the reach was achieved. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a "left" reach decorative pattern 10SH5L is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L when the reach was achieved, and a "right" reach decorative pattern 10SH5R is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R when the reach was achieved.

In addition, a small pattern display area 10SHK, which is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, is provided in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern is also called the notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing the small pattern that is the notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing the confirmed small pattern that is the display result is derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decorative pattern is performed. During the period from when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started to when the determined decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of the small pattern continues in a constant display mode and does not disappear from the screen or be blocked by an obstruction. Therefore, the small pattern display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always see the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 10SHK. The small pattern variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK is also called a constant small pattern or a small pattern for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a performance image showing a plurality of types of small patterns that are identifiable each other may be variably displayed as a notification information image in a display mode that is partially or entirely common to each of the plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern showing a number similar to the portion showing a number in the decorative pattern. The small symbols may be displayed only when the decorative symbols are not displayed. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A).

In addition, a fourth pattern may be provided following the special and decorative patterns, and the fourth pattern may be variable displayed in sync with the variable display of the special and decorative patterns. The variable display of the fourth pattern may be realized, for example, by continuing display control that repeatedly displays and hides a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth pattern display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth pattern, the display result in the variable display of the small patterns may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize.

The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, to the right side of the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the variable display of the special symbol is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. In response to this, by performing a variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to display whether the variable display is in progress or whether the display result has been derived in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In this example, a pending display area 10SHH is displayed to display a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA is displayed to display an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. Note that when a reach performance of a super reach is being executed, the pending display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may be hidden.

In addition, a reserved number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similar to the reserved number display area 10SHH, the reserved number of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed in a specific manner. The display form is a form in which it is displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the gaze guidance presentation 4 seconds before timing T4 during the execution of the reach presentation of the super reach. As a gaze guidance presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a presentation that uses a visual presentation effect, for example, to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

In this example, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC that resembles a character holding a hammer, and a button image 10SHB that resembles a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character performs the action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside, in accordance with the character's action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside, in time with the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the appearance of the various images so that the hammer swung down by the character hits the button image 10SHB and multiple star-like effect images 10SHS scatter from the button image 10SHB. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 starts a vibration performance, vibrating the push button 31B and lighting up the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Then, one second after timing T4, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the gaze guidance presentation, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration presentation has elapsed, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the vibration presentation, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and turns off the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Here, the push button 31B is located away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the play area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the state of the push button 31B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the push button 31B is vibrating or lit up. In response to this, by executing a gaze guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before it vibrates, and the vibration of the push button 31B can be appropriately recognized, sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

The priority of the display of the visual guidance effects is set lower than that of the constant small symbols and the reserved number display. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the visual guidance effects in a layer behind the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the reserved number display.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the constant small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the constant small pattern.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the reserved number display shown in the reserved number display area 10SHHS, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the reserved number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the eye guidance effects is set higher than the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative patterns. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the eye guidance effects in a layer that is closer to the front than the layers that display the background image and decorative patterns.

In this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of a "mountain view," and it can be said that the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB, which are displayed to guide the viewer's gaze, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of a "mountain view."

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the character image 10SHC, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the reserved display displayed in the reserved display area 10SHH, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the reserved display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the active display.

With this configuration, when the gaze guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the gaze guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring optimal visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), when the visual guidance effect is being executed, the display of the visual guidance effect and the constant small pattern and the reserved number display, which have a higher priority than the display of the visual guidance effect, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

With this configuration, when the gaze guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display can be more optimally ensured at all times, while the visibility of the gaze guidance effect can be made more noticeable.

(Modification of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the processing of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect may be set according to which type of vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect at different ratios according to whether the current vibration effect is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Here, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red is executed. Also, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the gaze-guiding effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. With this configuration, the execution of the gaze-guiding effect can increase the expectation of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance may be capable of executing a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance. In this case, as a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance, multiple types of vibration performance may be executed according to a combination of the linked advance notice performance, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a feature advance notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed according to the operating state of the movable body 32. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a vibration performance linked with a highly reliable feature advance notice performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked feature advance notice performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the feature advance notice performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may also be capable of executing a vibration performance linked to other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration performance vibrates the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview performance, and causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 may be one in which the jackpot game state is started when the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole, after the determined decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination is derived. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the player of the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may also execute a vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and notifies the player that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B may be vibrated for three seconds and illuminated in rainbow colors to definitively announce that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is the highest number of rounds among the multiple options. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect linked to the round lottery effect.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing an error notification process. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, an error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5, or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 may display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 when performing a gaze guidance performance. In that case, the display of the gaze guidance performance may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. With this configuration, even if a gaze guidance performance is being performed when the error notification image is displayed, the visibility of the error notification image can be preferably ensured.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the gaze guidance effect is performed and when the gaze guidance effect is not performed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is performed than when the gaze guidance effect is not performed, it is possible to increase the interest when the gaze guidance effect is performed and the vibration effect is performed. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is not performed than when the gaze guidance effect is performed, it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating even if the gaze guidance effect is not performed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be different before the reference timing and after the reference timing, with a certain timing as the reference. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before the timing T2 when the reach is established, and 3 seconds at the timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2, or at the timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2. In this way, the vibration time after the reference timing is longer than the vibration time before the reference timing. With this configuration, the performance effect when the vibration performance is executed after the reference timing can be improved.

The reliability of the jackpot of the vibration effect may be varied depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B. For example, the push button 31B may be vibrated with a first strength and a second strength greater than the first strength, and when the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength, the reliability of the jackpot of the vibration effect may be made higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength. With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the strength of the vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win may be the same for a first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and a second type of pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different from the first type. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win executed in the first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second type of pachinko gaming machine 1, respectively, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration effect may be executed as a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunities to execute the vibration effect.

In addition, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is the first mode and when it is the second mode. For example, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time and when it is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect.

Alternatively, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be set to be only executable at any one of multiple timings at which a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress. For example, the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be executed only at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which a vibration effect as a look-ahead preview can be executed, it is possible to conveniently recognize that a vibration effect has been executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress.

When a vibration performance is executed as a pre-reading notice performance at a timing when a vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed can be executed, the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance. For example, when a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continues to vibrate for a predetermined time, and the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. With this configuration, when a vibration effect can be executed as a pre-reading preview effect at a timing when a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, it is possible to easily recognize which vibration effect has been executed.

When the execution pattern of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability are common between a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type, the jackpot reliability may be common even if the mode of the vibration effect executed at the specific timing in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the mode of the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1. For example, for the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when a reach is established, even if the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed in the second type of pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is 100%. With this configuration, even if the models of the pachinko game machines 1 are different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B during the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect being executed at that time, for example, when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed. For example, when an announcement effect is executed to announce that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when the reach is achieved, the vibration effect is set to vibrate the push button 31B during the period when the image of the announcement effect is being displayed. With this configuration, even when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed for vibration effects of the same execution pattern. With this configuration, for example, when a vibration effect is executed as an effect to increase the chances of another effect, it is possible to flexibly adjust the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect while making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect can execute a provocative effect that encourages the development of a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability than the reach state after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination. After the provocative effect is executed, there are cases where the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and cases where the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss". When the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative success effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. On the other hand, when the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss", the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative failure effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. When executing such a provocation effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing when the provocation success effect is executed. This configuration can increase the interest when the provocation success effect is executed.

The vibration duration of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be adjusted to match the image of the teasing success effect. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the interest when the teasing success effect is executed.

The illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be the same as the illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. With this configuration, when the teasing success effect is executed, even if it develops into a reach state with a high jackpot reliability, the display result may be "miss," but it is possible to prevent the jackpot reliability from being excessively increased.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot," the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a vibration effect immediately before the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, is stopped. This configuration not only increases the interest in the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped, but also heightens the sense of anticipation for the vibration effect itself, and can increase interest when the vibration effect is executed at other times as well.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect can be "rainbow-colored" even when a "jackpot" occurs for a jackpot type other than the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different advantages for the player. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect becomes "rainbow-colored," it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a "jackpot" occurs for the jackpot type with the highest advantage.

If there are only two types of jackpots that provide players with different degrees of advantage, it is possible to avoid setting an execution pattern in which the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a jackpot of a type that provides a low degree of advantage to the player from occurring even if the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects, and thus prevents the player's expectations for the vibration effects from being diminished.

The presentation control CPU 120 may use an auditory presentation effect to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B as a visual guidance presentation. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may output a specific sound effect when a vibration presentation is being executed, and output the specific sound effect as a visual guidance presentation so that the volume gradually changes from a low volume to a high volume. With this configuration, a player who has difficulty recognizing visual guidance presentations that use visual presentation effects can be directed to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

When the configuration is such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the same execution pattern may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. For example, even when the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is "jackpot", the expectation of the highly advantageous setting value can be increased.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. With this configuration, the setting value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is any of "1" to "3" and when the setting value is any of "4" to "6". With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is a high setting that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player. Also, for example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is an odd number and when the setting value is an even number. With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is an even number that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player.

Even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. With this configuration, even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to draw attention not only to the fact that the vibration effect is being executed, but also to the state when the vibration effect is executed.

If it is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the reach is established. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is not executed at either the timing T1 or the timing T2, the combination of the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T1 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T2 may be a specific combination, so that the display result is definitively notified as "jackpot". With this configuration, even if the vibration effect that vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to glow in rainbow colors is not executed when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern begins, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is achieved, and to further increase attention to the vibration effect at the timing T2.

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect. In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T3 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T4 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed, not only can the expectation of the vibration effect being executed at timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect be increased, but the attention to the vibration effect at timing T4 can be further increased.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is not definitely a "jackpot". Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is not definitely a "jackpot" is monotonous, whereas in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot", the push button 31B vibrates in accordance with a predetermined rhythm. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When a vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when a normal reach is being performed or at timing T4 when a super reach is being performed, a visual guidance effect may be executed without fail. With this configuration, the sense of expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of a reach effect can be appropriately increased by appropriately recognizing the vibration of the operating means.

When a vibration effect is executed at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started or the timing T2 when a reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at either the timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed or the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the execution pattern of the vibration effect executable at the timing T3 or the timing T4 may be restricted so that the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 are not inferior to the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2, in other words, so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 is not inferior to the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is restricted from being executed at timing T3, and the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is restricted from being executed at timing T4. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the jackpot from decreasing when multiple vibration effects are executed in one variable display.

When a vibration effect linked to a preview performance can be executed, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the preview performance and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the preview performance may be different. For example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a reel preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the sound effect when the reel operates. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is illuminated in a color different from the illumination color of the push button 31B in a vibration performance not linked to a preview performance. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed, it is easy to recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to a preview performance or not.

It may be possible to execute a present box effect. In this case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the open present box, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), and a gaze-guiding effect may be executed. With this configuration, the execution of the present box effect can increase the sense of anticipation for the gaze-guiding effect and the vibration effect.

When an operation performance for operating the push button 31B can be executed, the push button 31B may be lit in this operation performance during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In this case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the lighting manner of the push button 31B in the vibration performance. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for vibration performance in which the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in red for 3 seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for button operation suggestion in which the push button 31B is switched between red illumination (illumination) and non-illumination (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In addition, during a valid lever operation period during which the operation of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A may be lit up to notify that the operation of the operating lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is lit up in a lever operation suggestion mode during the valid lever operation period. The lighting mode for the lever operation suggestion may be the same as the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion, or may be a different lighting mode from the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion.

For example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like may be operated by the player to change settings related to the effects, such as the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of music or background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from a menu screen, or a different operation may be performed corresponding to the item to be changed by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. In addition, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lit to notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation effect. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 10SH)
In relation to characteristic part 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, see JP 2019-051075 A).

Generally, players play games while looking at the display means on which the variable display and various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, there is a possibility that the player will not be aware that the operating means is vibrating even when a vibration effect is executed. In such a case, the interest of the vibration effect cannot be sufficiently heightened.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effects are executed and to sufficiently heighten interest in the vibration effects, the gaming machine of means 1 relating to characteristic section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, etc.), and includes operation means that can be operated by the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a push button 31B that the player can press to perform a predetermined instruction operation, etc.), vibration effect execution means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates, etc.), and a vibration effect that can be executed by the player. and a visual line guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B, etc.), and the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation can execute a vibration presentation at any one of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when a reach is established, and at any one of timing T3 during which the reach presentation of a normal reach is being executed, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, and timing T4 during which the reach presentation of a super reach is being executed), and can execute the vibration presentation in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a vibration presentation at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or at timing T3 and The vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether the timing is T1 or T4), and the visual guidance effect execution means does not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute a visual guidance effect at timings T1 and T2), and can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timings T3 and T4).

This configuration allows the player to focus on the operating means before the vibration effect is executed, and can adequately increase interest in the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 relating to feature 10SH may be configured such that in the gaming machine of means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 relating to feature 10SH may be equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the gaze guidance effect in the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a reach effect of a super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, etc.).

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be performed while a specific effect is being performed, which can increase interest.

The gaming machine of feature 10SH according to means 4 may be equipped with a display means for displaying information in any of the gaming machines of means 1 to 3 (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be equipped with an image display device 5 for displaying various presentation images, etc.), and the display of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the display of specified information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information (e.g., the presentation image of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the constant small symbols, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, decorative symbols, etc.).

With this configuration, when the visual guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the visual guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring the visibility of the specified information.

The gaming machine of feature 5 relating to feature 10SH is a gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 4, in which the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect of a first mode and the vibration effect of a second mode that suggests a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red), and when the visual guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second mode is more likely to be executed than the vibration effect of the first mode (for example, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a visual guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red is more likely to be executed than a vibration effect of the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white).

With this configuration, the gaze guidance effect can be executed, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for the execution of the second type of vibration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature of the characteristic feature 10SH may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate. The combined feature features or individual uncombined feature features may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows a configuration example of the performance device related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance, which serves as a movable performance device, is provided at the lower end front, which is the lower edge part on the front side overlapping with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operation motor via a link mechanism, for example. The movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be one whose position can be changed by power from, for example, an operation solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame of the movable body 32 is made of a decorative material and has a configuration that can be covered so that the player cannot see the display screen of the image display device 5. The window of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through configuration that allows the player to see the display screen of the image display device 5.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, multiple LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and multiple LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the game machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position to the left of the game area in the game machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position to the right of the game area in the game machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and multiple LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of multiple LEDs built into the operating stick (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of multiple LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be formed in part or in whole from a translucent material. This allows the operating lever of the stick controller 31A to be illuminated when the lever lamp 9B1 is lit. Also, the push button 31B to be illuminated when the button lamp 9B2 is lit.

For example, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or in a position close to the push button 31B, or may be built into the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or provided at the base position of the operation lever. Multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

In the pachinko game machine 1, an operation section performance including a light-emitting performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestive performance that indicates that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration manner according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Note that in the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, one of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. For example, only the push button 31B may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting only the button lamp 9B2.

Figure 12-2 (A) shows an example of the setting of an operation unit performance pattern used to execute an operation unit performance. In this setting example, operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to AKC13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as multiple operation unit performance patterns. A light emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and use are set corresponding to each operation unit performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the light emission state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the vibration state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit presentation pattern indicates the percentage of times that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state when the operation unit presentation corresponding to the operation unit presentation pattern is executed. The use corresponding to the operation unit presentation pattern indicates the timing at which the operation unit presentation is executed for each operation unit presentation pattern.

The operation unit performance can be executed at multiple times in accordance with the progress of the variable display, such as when the pre-change starts, when the target change starts, when a reach is established, when the reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification tease is given. The pre-change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. The target change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. When a reach is established, it is a timing corresponding to the case where the variable display becomes a reach state. When a reach develops, it is a timing corresponding to the case where a development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of a super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies the execution of a reach performance of a super reach (reach development) after the reach performance of a normal reach is executed. When a hit/miss notification tease is given, it is a timing corresponding to the teasing performance before the hit/miss notification performance that notifies the execution of whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" while the reach performance of a super reach is being executed.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 12-2(A), multiple operation unit performance patterns that can be used to execute operation unit performances according to multiple timings are prepared in advance. Also, it is set up so that different operation unit performance patterns can be used according to multiple timings at which the operation unit performances can be executed.

When the reach performance of the super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach performance of the normal reach is executed and the reach performance of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether the reach performance of the super reach is executed and the fixed decoration pattern of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether the game state is controlled to the jackpot. For the reach performance of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach performances including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances with different performance modes. Each reach performance may include performances with a common performance mode. The determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" may be set so that the reliability of the jackpot is according to each reach performance. It is only necessary to set the presence or absence of the reach performance, the presence or absence of the reach performance of the super reach, the performance mode in the reach performance, etc. according to the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random number value for determining the variation pattern.

Regardless of the specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as reach effects, the execution of the operation unit effects can be determined at a predetermined rate according to whether the variable display result is a "jackpot". Such operation unit effects that can be executed regardless of specific effects are also called standalone operation unit effects. In contrast, effects that cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light or vibrate in association with specific effects may be executed. Such effects that cause light emission or vibration in association with specific effects are also called specific linked effects.

Figure 12-2 (B) shows a setting example when a specific interlocking performance is executed. In this setting example, the light emission color and vibration pattern are set when a specific interlocking performance is executed in conjunction with multiple specific performances, such as the movable body operation, image display, music playback, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The light emission color in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is common to the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking performance is included in the special vibration performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance. The illumination of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during a specific linked performance is included in the specific illumination performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance.

The reach effect of SP Reach A may be, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. The jackpot type selection CH1 may be a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the smallest (e.g., 4 rounds). The jackpot type selection CH2 may be a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is the second jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the largest (e.g., 16 rounds). In addition, the jackpot type selection CH1 and CH2 may be a selection effect regarding the type of jackpot depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot game state and the end conditions, or may be a selection effect regarding the presence or absence of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, and the amount of increase. As the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, when the jackpot game state can be controlled to a certain probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that entered the V entry port of the V entry attacker, a lottery performance for a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage may be executed depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the end conditions of the certain probability variable control. When the small win game state can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a V entry due to a game ball entering the V entry attacker, a lottery performance for a small win game state or a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage may be executed depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the jackpot game state controlled after the occurrence of a V entry.

Until the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and then, during the period from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released to the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. Then, when a V winning occurs, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and a performance including the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is more difficult to detect than the strong vibration monitoring state. In a period in which there is a high risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state. In contrast, in a period in which there is a low risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, it is sufficient that control can be executed to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, such as displaying an alarm image, outputting an alarm sound, turning on an alarm lamp, outputting an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these, under the control of the performance control CPU 120. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be put into a game stop state under the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100. This allows appropriate vibration monitoring and prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to an inappropriate abnormality judgment resulting in a vibration error being notified or a game stop state being put into place.

Figure 12-3 shows the vibration pattern settings. A number of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration modes of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Figure 12-3 (A) shows the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects. Figure 12-3 (B) shows the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration effects included in the specific linked effects.

Vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on and off periods alternate three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed when the pre-fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the light color of the light effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV02, the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed when the pre-change starts. In addition, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed when the target change starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-change start or the target change start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC02, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC03, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect becomes rainbow. In the operation unit presentation using operation unit presentation pattern AKC11, the color of the light emitted by the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is white in response to the vibration presentation.

In vibration pattern AKV03, the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effects by operation unit effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed when the target fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the operation unit effects by vibration pattern AKV03 are not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the target fluctuation start. In the operation unit effects by operation unit effect pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is rainbow.

In vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKR1 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21, the light color of the light effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22, the light color of the light effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes orange.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when a reach is achieved, an effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is achieved. For example, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is achieved. Also, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is achieved. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is achieved and the operation unit effect executed when the pre-change starts or the target change starts. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, by having the vibration mode of the vibration effect be common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data of the effect.

In vibration pattern AKV21, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the performance AKS1 when a reach develops. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the light color in the light-emitting performance that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration performance becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKS2 when a reach develops. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32, the light color in the light effect that illuminates the stick controller 31A and push button 31B in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach develops, an effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of the reach development. For example, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops. Also, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach develops. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach develops and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-change or the start of the target change. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that the control burden of the effect and the increase in control data can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period may continue until the player's action on the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inviting the winner or loser. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the win/lose notification effect. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, the light color of the light-emitting effect that causes the stick controller 31A and push button 31B to light up in conjunction with the vibration effect is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect is executed by the vibration pattern AKV31, whether or not to set an effective detection period may be different depending on the type of effect executed with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. When a valid detection period is set, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. In addition, when a valid detection period is not set, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have a light-emitting mode for vibration effect that continuously emits gold light over the period in which the operation lever and push button 31B are vibrated. On the other hand, when a valid detection period is set, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between red light emission (on) different from gold and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. By executing a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting mode is switched between light-emitting and non-light-emitting every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation of the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is valid while executing the vibration performance. Alternatively, the priority of the light-emitting control may be made different by using a plurality of lamp layers in which the lamp control data can be set. For example, the first lamp layer is set with lamp control data for a light-emitting mode in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between red light-emitting (on) and non-light-emitting (off) every 150 milliseconds as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation. The second lamp layer is set with lamp control data for a light-emitting mode in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is continuously light-emitting in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a special operation. Then, the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is executed with priority over the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. This allows the light effects to be controlled so that the light effects that suggest special operations take precedence over the light effects that suggest normal operations.

The multiple reach effects that become super reaches may include a strong SP reach with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of a strong SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed after a motion detection effect is executed by detecting the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a strong SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode continues for an on period until the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. In the reach effect of a weak SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed without executing a motion detection effect. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a weak SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit/miss notification effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the operation unit performance when the reach performance of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation performance when the reach performance of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the valid detection period. Alternatively, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds and an off period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B is not vibrated during the valid detection period. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of the weak SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed and the operation performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed. For example, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the valid detection period. In contrast, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds to emit gold light.

Vibration pattern AKV41 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV42 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the screen display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV43 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV44 provides a vibration pattern in which the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

Vibration caused by vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes blue along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration caused by vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes gold along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration caused by vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance that is executed in conjunction with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance changes from blue to red to gold in response to the vibration of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

The vibrations caused by the vibration pattern AKV44 may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, or may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, CH2. In specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes white as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH2, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

Figure 12-4 shows an example of an effect that is executed by vibrating and illuminating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, multiple effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B only need to emit light in the normal light-emitting state with a normal light-emitting brightness set to a low light-emitting brightness and a white light-emitting color. Alternatively, in the normal light-emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-illumination so that they do not emit light.

In the performance execution example AKA01, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white. When an operation unit performance is executed using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the light color becomes white. Operation unit performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a pre-variation. Operation unit performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a target variation. Both operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performances using operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22. The light color also becomes white when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific performance.

In the example of effect execution, AKA02, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red. When an operation unit effect is executed using either operation unit effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light color becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. Operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. Both operation unit effects using operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect using operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03. When playing music for SP Reach A as a specific effect, a performance period in which the light color becomes red is also included.

In the example of effect execution, AKA03, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors. When an operation unit effect is executed using either operation unit effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13, the light-emitting color becomes rainbow. Operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. Operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. Both operation unit effects using operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 have a jackpot reliability of 100%. Operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02. Operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03. The light-emitting color also becomes rainbow when a specific effect such as a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

In the performance execution example AKA04, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in pink. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 is executed, the light color becomes pink. Operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV11.

In the performance execution example AKA05, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in orange. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 is executed, the light color becomes orange. Operation unit performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV12.

In performance execution example AKV06, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated blue. When an operation section performance is executed, the light color does not turn blue. When the movable body operation of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light color turns blue. Also, when music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light color turns blue is included.

In the performance execution example AKV07, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in gold. When an operation section performance is executed by operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. Operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing an operation section performance during a hit/miss notification. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV31. When an image display of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light emission color becomes gold. Also, when a music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light emission color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the light emission colors of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance. In addition to the light emission color, any light emission mode, such as the light emission time, the number of times light is emitted (the number of times it flashes), the light emission cycle (the flashing cycle), and the light emission brightness, may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance.

When the operation section performance is executed at the start of the advance variation, it can be executed as a pre-reading notice performance or a continuous notice performance. The pre-reading notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" continuously over multiple variable displays that are executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance can be executed using a continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number. The reserved memory number here may be the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning. As the continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number, multiple continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning, and is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

Figure 12-5 shows an example of the continuous performance pattern settings used to execute the continuous preview performance. The continuous performance pattern can be determined, for example, by using a random number value for determining the continuous performance pattern, referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and determining the determination result to which a determination value matching the random number value is assigned according to the result of the winning determination.

Figure 12-5 (A) shows the continuous performance patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC11 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (B) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "3". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (C) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "4". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S161 of Figure 9 as a pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in Figure 12-6, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables the execution of a pre-reading notice performance that becomes a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is judged whether or not the performance control command transmitted at the time of the start winning (starting port winning designation command, reserved memory number notification command, winning time judgment result command) has been received. If no command is received, it is judged that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. If a command is received, the notification content according to the received command is identified, and for example, the winning time judgment result is identified as the notification content according to the winning time judgment result command.

The winning judgment result may be a result of judging whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern by the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of the special pattern process process using the game random number extracted at the time of the starting winning. The winning judgment result may be, for example, any of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmed on miss, reach confirmed on miss, or general on miss. The winning judgment result of a jackpot is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot judgment range and is controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result of a super reach confirmed on miss is a judgment result included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach confirmed range on miss, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result for a reach confirmation on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range on a miss. The winning judgment result for a general win on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range on a miss nor within the reach confirmation range.

The pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, the pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the current winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, and all previous winning judgment results corresponding to the reserved memory have been general on a miss. Note that if the pre-reading prediction performance that will result in a consecutive prediction performance is already set to start, the pre-reading prediction condition may be restricted from being established.

If the pre-reading prediction condition is not met (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading prediction setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading prediction condition is met (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction (step AKS102). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction may be extracted, and depending on the result of the winning judgment, a pre-reading prediction execution decision table stored in advance in ROM121 may be referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction, thereby determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance. In step AKS102, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance, either "no execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is not executed, or "execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is executed. It is determined whether or not the result of the decision at this time has been determined to be "execution" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Next, the consecutive performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the consecutive performance pattern may be extracted, and the consecutive performance pattern may be determined to be one of a number of patterns by referring to a consecutive performance pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to the result of the winning judgment.

After the continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105, a pre-reading preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading preview flag provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control flag setting section) may be set to an ON state.

In such a pre-reading notice setting process, if the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be established, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice in step AKS102 and the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105. If the winning judgment result is a jackpot, step AKS102 may determine "execution yes" to execute the pre-reading notice performance at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, in step AKS105, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. In this way, it is sufficient that the continuous notice performance that becomes the pre-reading notice performance can be executed based on the winning judgment result that becomes the pre-reading judgment result.

Figure 12-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of Figure 9 as a variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 12-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern, etc., which will be the final decorative pattern as the variable display result of the decorative pattern (step AKS201). The performance control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display content, such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The variable pattern designation command and the display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by setting the transmission of the command at the start of the special pattern's variation when the variable pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special pattern process process. The variable pattern designation command is a performance control command that designates the variable pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a performance control command that designates the variable display result determined using a random number value for determining the special pattern display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display results may be "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probability variable (jackpot)", and "probability variable (jackpot)".

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not enter a reach state, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern enters a reach state, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach miss combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a probability change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns consisting of the same even-numbered patterns is determined as the final stop pattern. Also, when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," it is sufficient if a combination of fixed decorative patterns consisting of the same odd-numbered patterns can be determined as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a non-reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When determining a combination of fixed decorative patterns, for example, numerical data that will be a random number value for pattern determination is extracted, and the stopping pattern of the decorative patterns can be determined by referring to a pattern determination table that is stored in advance in ROM121 according to the variable display content.

After the final stop pattern and the like are determined, the operation section presentation is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. For example, if the pre-reading preview flag is on, it may be determined that a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. If a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operation section presentation pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the consecutive presentation pattern. The consecutive presentation pattern may be the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading preview setting process, and may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading preview flag may be cleared to the off state.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not being performed, the presence or absence of the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit performance pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation unit performance may be extracted, and depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot", the presence or absence of the operation unit performance, i.e., whether or not to execute the operation unit performance, and the operation unit performance pattern to be used when executing the operation unit performance may be determined by referring to an operation unit performance determination table previously stored in RAM121. The operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display may be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not being performed, and may not be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is being performed. Therefore, a limit is set for the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit performance included in the pre-reading preview performance is executed.

In step AKS202, when a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance is executed in conjunction with a specific performance based on a fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted. For example, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at any timing. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that all operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit performance at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at the timing corresponding to the development of the reach or the announcement of the hit or miss. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that some operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. In addition, within the range of the variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be set so that some or all of the operation unit effects are difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120, which determines the operation unit effects in step AKS202, can limit the execution of the operation unit effects, including the vibration effect, when a special vibration effect is executed.

When the operation unit performance is determined by step AKS202, if a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the result of the judgment at the time of winning, the determination ratio of the operation unit performance may be set so that some or all of the operation unit performance is more likely to be executed during the execution of the variable display than when the special performance is not executed.

After the operation section performance is determined, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (variable display performance control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. The performance control CPU 120 may also select one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (operation section performance control patterns) in response to the operation section performance determined in step AKS202, and set it as the usage pattern. In addition, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the performance control timer setting section) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the decorative pattern or the like is started to vary on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (variable display performance control pattern) determined in step AKS203 can be transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby starting the variation of the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After the variable start setting is performed, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display and the like, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the performance process during the variable display (step AKS207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 12-8 shows an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. The performance control pattern includes a variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) and an operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B). The variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) includes control data used to control the execution of various performances from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. The operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation unit performance.

The variable display performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, and end code. The performance control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the performance control process timer value, which is the stored value of the performance control process timer, and a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (performance time) of each performance operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, data indicating the timing of switching the performance control, etc., may be set in response to a specified control content or processing content, such as, for example, a specified performance control command being received from the main board 11, or a specified process being executed as a process for controlling a performance operation in the performance control CPU 120.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variable mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects etc. linked to the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating the light emission drive mode of light-emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of light-emitting bodies during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes data indicating the performance operation mode corresponding to the detection of the player's action, such as the effective detection period during which the player's action, such as tilting the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, pointing to the trigger button, or pressing the push button 31B, is effectively detected, and data specifying the control content of the performance operation when each action is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating, for example, the on period and drive mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all performance control patterns, and there may be performance control patterns that include some of the control data depending on the content of the performance action by each performance control pattern. Furthermore, for multiple types of process data included in a performance control pattern, the type of control data that makes up each process data may differ depending on the content of the performance action executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data that includes all of the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and there may be process data that includes some of these. Furthermore, various other control data may be included, such as movable body control data that indicates the operating state of the movable body 32.

In the variable display performance processing in step S172 of the performance control process processing, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, a determination is made as to whether it matches any of the performance control process timer judgment values, and if it does match, control of the performance operation is performed according to the various corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 proceeds with the control of the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, light-emitting elements such as game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) according to the contents of process data #1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the performance control pattern. In addition, in each process data #1 to #n, the display control data #1 to #n, audio control data #1 to #n, lamp control data #1 to #n, operation detection control data #1 to #n, and vibration control data #1 to #n correspond to the performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n, and constitute the performance control execution data #1 to #n that indicate the control content of the performance operation in the performance device and specify the execution of performance control.

The operation unit performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, and vibration control data. The lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light-emitting body in the operation unit performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In other words, the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data that indicates the on period and drive mode of the vibration generating device in the operation unit performance, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131. In other words, the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-9 shows an example of the timing settings for the operation section performance in vibration performance execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings for which the operation section performance can be executed at the start of pre-change, corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the pre-change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, the operation section performance can be executed at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-change, depending on the remaining number of times. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT01, if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT02, and if the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target change, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance can be executed at the start of the target change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the advance change, the operation unit performance can be executed using the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times, and then at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance can be executed using the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times being "0". Also, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance may be executed. Specifically, if one of the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit performance can be executed using the determined operation unit performance pattern at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change.

The timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as timing AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be such that the operation unit performance can be executed at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the operation unit performance can be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in Figure 12-9 are timings at which the operation unit presentation when a reach is established, when a reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification is triggered can be executed as operation unit presentations corresponding to the current variable display. For example, depending on the operation unit presentation pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, there are cases where an operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, a case where an operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach develops, and a case where an operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT14 when a hit/miss notification is triggered. Specifically, if either operation unit presentation pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, an operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Also, if step AKS202 determines that either operation unit presentation pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT13, which is the time when the reach develops. Alternatively, if step ASK202 determines that operation unit presentation pattern AKC41 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is the time when the win/loss notification is triggered.

Figure 12-10 shows an example of control of the operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-10 (A) becomes white, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in Figure 12-10 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds, as shown in Figure 12-10 (B). The light emission performance associated with this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance, as shown in Figure 12-10 (A). During the off period of the vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In the light emission effect, the light color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration effect, and the white light emission luminance may change periodically, for example, by alternating between a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low white light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during the on-period of 300 milliseconds.

Figure 12-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds as shown in Figure 12-11 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the operation section performance pattern AKC02, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the operation section performance pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in a rainbow of colors by transitioning between red, red-purple, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange light colors according to the elapsed time and the light emission position. The light emission positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be specified as multiple sections, such as the top and bottom of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and it is sufficient that the light emission time, light emission color, and light emission brightness may be partially or entirely set according to each section.

Figure 12-12 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC11. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC11 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color shown in Figure 12-12 (A) becomes white, and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV02 shown in Figure 12-12 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds as shown in Figure 12-12 (B). The light emission presentation accompanying this vibration presentation is achieved by the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 lighting up in white in accordance with the on period of the vibration presentation, as shown in Figure 12-12 (A). In the light emission effect, the light color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration effect, and the white light emission luminance may change periodically during the on-period of 1500 milliseconds, for example, by alternating between a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low white light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds.

Figure 12-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC12 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC13 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds, as shown in Figure 12-13 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC12, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may periodically change the light emission brightness of red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with a high light emission brightness of red light and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 has a light emission mode that changes the light emission brightness in a shorter period than the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. In this way, the light emission performance may be performed in a different light emission period as well as a different light emission color, so that the reliability of a big win can be suggested. During the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternating between red light emission and non-emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light-emitting effect, the light emission cycle may be common, but the light emission color may be different to indicate the reliability of a jackpot. In this way, for example, when the light-emitting colors in the light-emitting effects are different, the light-emitting cycle may be common, thereby reducing the control burden of the light-emitting effects.

Figure 12-14 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed in response to the performance AKR1 shown in Figure 12-14 (A) which becomes the performance when the reach is established at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-14 (B) becomes pink, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in Figure 12-14 (C). The performance AKR1 which becomes the performance when the reach is established may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a performance that displays a background image according to the reach establishment, or may be any other performance associated with the establishment of the reach. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds) as shown in Figure 12-14 (C). As shown in FIG. 12-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is achieved by the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 lighting up in pink in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the OFF period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off.

Figure 12-15 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22. The operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, shown in Figure 12-15 (A) at the timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and includes a light emission presentation in which the light color shown in Figure 12-15 (B) becomes orange, and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV12 shown in Figure 12-15 (C). Presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, may be, for example, a presentation that displays a presentation image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a presentation that displays a background image according to the establishment of a reach, or may be any other presentation associated with the establishment of a reach. Presentation AKR1 and presentation AKR2, which are the presentations when a reach is established, may have different presentation forms. As shown in FIG. 12-15(C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is a vibration mode including an on period of the first vibration on time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) alternately repeated twice, followed by an on period of the second vibration on time (e.g., 250 milliseconds) and an on period of the third vibration on time (e.g., 500 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In addition, when the on period of the vibration effect is a different vibration on time, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange continuously. In contrast, during the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently. During the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternate between emitting orange light and not emitting light every 20 milliseconds, thereby intermittently emitting orange light.

The operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, corresponding to the performances AKS1 and AKS2 when the reach develops, and include a light emission performance in which the light color becomes white, and a vibration performance by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC32, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS2. In both cases of operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the light emission performance associated with these vibration performances is that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the win/lose prompting performance at the timing AKT14 when the win/lose notification is prompted, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds or more. The light emission performance accompanying this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 lighting up in gold in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect includes the case where the light emission color becomes white and the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03, which is different from vibration pattern AKV02, is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between the case where the light emission color becomes white and the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that when the light emission color becomes red and when the light emission color becomes rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both cases. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32. In this way, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops have a common light-emitting color of white, and there are cases where the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes are common, while the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the interest in the game. In addition, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 or AKC13. As in this case, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops may have different light-emitting modes and different vibration modes. As in the case where the light-emitting color becomes white, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting mode that is common to the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Also, as in the case where the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts may include a light-emitting mode that is different from the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not have to include an illumination pattern of the illumination effect that is different from the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered include operation unit effects by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes gold in association with the vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV31. This operation unit effect has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered have a common jackpot reliability of 100%, and there are cases in which the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different. In addition, the light emission color and vibration pattern of the vibration effect are different between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the reliability of the big hit is the same, but the vibration pattern of the vibration effect or the light emission pattern of the light emission effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be increased.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white, red, or rainbow in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is achieved, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting patterns of the light-emitting patterns and the vibration patterns of the vibration effects differ between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is achieved. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section performance differs, the light emission mode of the light emission performance differs, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance differs, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in playing can be increased.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when a reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when a reach is developed include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect and the vibration state of the vibration effect are different between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when a reach is developed. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light emission state of the light emission performance or the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a white light emission color. Also, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a pink or orange light emission color. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, even if the light emission state of the light emission performance is the same, the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT01 to AKT03 when the preliminary fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, the jackpot reliability is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing when the vibration performance is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration effect can be varied by varying the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity caused by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong and weak vibrations in vibration intensity, or any other vibration pattern that vibrates an operating member such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

The multiple specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the moving body operation, image display, music playback, or the jackpot confirmation notification, and the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. Therefore, the vibration performance by the operation unit performance has a higher jackpot reliability than the reach performance of SP Reach A, and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state when executed is higher. The moving body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A are all executed as part of the reach performance, so they do not have individual jackpot reliability. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is a performance that definitely notifies that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type selection CH1, CH2 differ from effects with a high jackpot reliability, such as the reach effect of SP Reach A, in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this way, for a specific effect that has a high jackpot reliability among multiple specific effects, it is sufficient that the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the specific effect is executed. Also, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the vibration effect is not executed by the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-16 shows an example of the performance of effects achieved by illuminating the game effect lamps 9. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2. Here, multiple performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the mode of performance execution by illuminating the lights.

In performance execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color becomes red in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In the performance execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in red to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors due to the illumination effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13 includes an illumination effect in which the illumination color becomes rainbow in conjunction with the vibration effect.

In performance execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white display color from left to right, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated to change from black to white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated white by a lighting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a lighting effect in which the light color changes to white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In performance execution example AKF04, when the text display on the image display device 5 is blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in blue to match the text display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color becomes white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

For example, a predetermined performance by displaying background display, text display, or any other performance image on the image display device 5 can be executed according to the progress of the game, including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the performance processing during variable display executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing, control is performed to execute a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, such as variable display, using control data read from the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting processing. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5 and lamp control data for controlling the emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. If an operation unit performance is executed during the execution of such a predetermined performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 can light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance in the operation unit performance. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the control data read from the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the execution of the operation unit performance. This control data includes lamp control data for controlling the emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. In response to the emission performance associated with the vibration performance in such an operation unit performance, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a different light emission mode from the light emission performance of the operation unit performance associated with a predetermined performance. In this way, by making the emission modes different between the operation members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N, the performance by light emission can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

The predetermined performance may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in a color that matches the audio output, such as background music, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in a color that matches the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R are used to output a sound that is a message that gives the player an impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in red in accordance with the audio output, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in white by the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. Even in this way, by making the light-emitting modes of the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A different from those of the other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N different, the light-emitting effects can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. The predetermined effect may be to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and make the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. non-illuminated (turned off). When this predetermined effect is executed, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect that vibrates the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 12-17 shows an example of the setting of a performance period in which a specific linked performance can be executed in vibration performance execution example AKE02. Period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific linked performance can be executed, including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41, in association with the movement of the movable body in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in period AKZ01 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes blue in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41. Period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance can be executed, including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42, in association with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in period AKZ02 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes gold in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects using vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with the playback of music in the reach effect of SP Reach A. The specific linked effects that can be executed in period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B changes from blue to red to gold in conjunction with the special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV43.

The period AKZ04 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific linked effects executable during period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B becomes rainbow-colored in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44. The jackpot confirmation notification may be any notification that allows the player to recognize a jackpot by stopping and displaying a confirmed decorative pattern that results in the display of a decorative pattern, displaying a performance image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach presentation, outputting a jackpot confirmation notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, turning on a jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these.

Following the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, a specific link performance may be executed during the period AKZ04 associated with the big win confirmation notification. In this case, the specific link performance associated with the big win confirmation notification is executed while the operation unit performance heightens the player's sense of expectation, thereby enhancing the impression of the performance and improving the interest in playing. When executing a specific link performance following such an operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance or the special vibration performance may be different between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance, or the light emission mode of the light emission performance or the specific light emission performance may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration performance and the special vibration performance. The light emission brightness may be different between the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance. By making the vibration mode and light emission mode different to give the performance a sharp contrast, the difference between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance can be easily recognized, the performance can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in playing can be improved.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. Specific linked effects executable during period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes white in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Specific linked effects executable during period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes rainbow in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

Figures 12-18 to 12-20 show cases where the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Figure 12-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when a movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when an image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when a music is played in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the reach mode and the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position at the lower front end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Next, when the reach performance of the SP reach A is started by the reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, as in the performance execution example AKG01, and the movable body operation is performed. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linear movement or parallel movement upward from the initial position, and a performance image showing a message such as "SP reach A" is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion provided inside the movable body 32. After that, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the performance execution example AKG02. At this time, a performance image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is ..." is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32.

As the position of the movable body 32 is changed, as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed along with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17. Furthermore, when the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the performance execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ01 ends. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrates every 250 milliseconds and an off period in which no vibration occurs. Also, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that continuously lights up the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in blue over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that switches between blue light (on) and no light (off) every 250 milliseconds.

When the movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a light pattern in which the light color and light brightness gradually change from bottom to top as the position of the movable body 32 is changed. For example, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in such a way that the light color becomes blue and the light brightness changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time.

After the movable body operation is completed as in performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in performance execution example AKG11, as an image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. At this time, for example, text display showing the message "Super Hot" is displayed in a gold display color. Also, as in performance execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the text display.

In conjunction with the display of the performance image, which is an image display such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed in conjunction with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold during the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 12-17. When the display of the text indicating the message ends and the display of the performance image in the reach performance different from the text display begins, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the text display indicating the message "Super Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ02. Also, during period AKZ02, a specific light-emitting effect may be performed by illuminating the operating lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in a light-emitting mode that alternates between a first luminance with a high gold light emission brightness and a second luminance with a low gold light emission brightness every 10 milliseconds.

When image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, for example, to match the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 and the emission color of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, with the display of a performance image resulting in an image display such as performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, and when the display of a performance image such as performance execution example AKG13 begins, they may emit light of a color different from gold.

After the display of a performance image such as that in performance execution example AKG13 has begun, the sound of music phrase PH01 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A as in performance execution example AKG21. Next, the sound of music phrase PH02 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG22. After that, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG23. In this way, by outputting the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 in sequence as the performance progresses, it is possible to execute the overall music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

In conjunction with the output of sound that results in music playback as in performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific linked performance is executed, causing the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to vibrate and emit light. The specific linked performance executed in conjunction with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV43 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color changes from blue to red, and then from red to gold, during the period AKZ03 shown in FIG. 12-17. In performance execution example AKG21, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes blue in response to the sound output of music phrase PH01. In performance execution example AKG22, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes red in response to the sound output of music phrase PH02. In performance execution example AKG23, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes gold in response to the sound output of music phrase PH03. In this way, it is possible to execute a specific light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to multiple colors as the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 are output in sequence as the effect progresses.

Figure 12-21 shows a music playback execution example AKH01 in which the scales change in sequence as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in Figure 12-21 (A), during a period AKZ03 in which a specific linked performance can be executed in conjunction with music playback, sounds corresponding to the scales of Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Si, and Do are output by speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of Do output last needs to be one octave higher than the scale of Do output first.

Such a specific linked performance associated with music playback includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color changes as shown in FIG. 12-21(B) and a vibration performance in which the special vibration performance is based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 12-21(C), and can be executed during a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration performance shown in FIG. 12-21(C) is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. In the specific light-emitting performance associated with this special vibration performance, the light-emitting color of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 changes in sequence between blue, red, and gold in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration performance, as shown in FIG. 12-21(B). During the stop period of the sound output and the off period of the special vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. Note that, during the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting performance may be different for each scale. For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously illuminated in blue over a period corresponding to the scale of C that is first output. Next, during a period corresponding to the scale of D, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between a first luminance with a high red illumination luminance and a second luminance with a low red illumination luminance. After that, during a period corresponding to the scale of E, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between gold illumination (lit) and non-illumination (unlit). In this way, by providing illumination modes with different amounts of illumination for each illumination color corresponding to each scale, the presentation can be appropriately diversified and interest in the game can be increased.

The reach effect of SP Reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is set to be able to execute a specific linked effect in association with a specific effect such as the movable body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A by the lamp control data and vibration control data. In the specific linked effect, a special vibration effect can be executed by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration form is different between the special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation unit effect. In this way, the vibration form is different between the vibration effect in the operation unit effect that can be executed regardless of the specific effect and the special vibration effect in the specific linked effect that can be executed in association with the execution of the specific effect, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When an operation section performance is executed, a vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is accompanied by a light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a specific linked performance is executed, a specific light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is executed in conjunction with a special vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. By executing a performance that includes vibration and light emission of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, for example, a player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 will recognize the vibration and light emission of the operation members that are different from the image display, and the unexpectedness of the performance will be enhanced.

During the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movement of movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP Reach A. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect during the movement period of movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 12-17, in response to a confirmed jackpot notification, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific linkage effects include specific light emission effects in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 light up in association with a special vibration effect produced by one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects in the operation unit effects and the specific light emission effects accompanying the special vibration effects in the specific linkage effects differ in terms of light emission patterns, such as light color. In this way, by making the light emission patterns different depending on the operation unit effects and the specific linkage effects, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, and the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are executed at different times and have different vibration patterns. Also, the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the pre-variation, and the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are white, red, or rainbow, so that the light emission patterns of the light emission patterns are the same. In this way, by providing cases where the vibration patterns of the vibration effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different, while the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are the same, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, are executed in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the operation unit effects are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning time judgment result, which is the pre-reading judgment result. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit effects are executed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 12-10 and FIG. 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start of the pre-variation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the light emission color is white and when the light emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effects is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby appropriately diversifying the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increasing the interest in the game. Note that when the light emission color is red and when the light emission color is rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance patterns used to execute the continuous preview performance include operation unit performance patterns in which the light emission color in the light emission performance differs depending on whether the remaining number is other than "0" or "0". For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) includes an operation unit performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number is "1" and an operation unit performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number is "0". The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes white. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission mode is different between the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. In this way, by providing different lighting conditions for the lighting effects when the timing for executing the operation section effects differs, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous notice performance, the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is set to prevent the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large from being lower than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), if the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". If the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 or the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This prevents the operation unit performance with a low jackpot reliability from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation, etc., even though the operation unit performance with a high jackpot reliability was executed first at the start of the pre-variation, so that the player's expectations are not lowered and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white, and when the light emission color is white, light emission and non-emission are repeated in accordance with the on and off periods of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted continuously in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white. When the light emission color is white, light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03. The vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 have different on period settings, so the light emission patterns, such as the light emission period of the light emission effects, are different. Even in this way, it is sufficient to provide cases where the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different.

(Modifications of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific linked performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For the operation unit performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. For the specific linkage performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, for the operation unit performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree. For the specific linkage performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree.

The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different and when it is common, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance is different and when it is common, when the jackpot reliability is different and when it is common, etc., can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of execution is different and when it is common between the operation unit performance and the specific linked performance, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance and the special vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance is different and when it is common, can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission performance by making the light emission mode of the light emission performance common. When the light emission modes of the light emission performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making the vibration mode of the vibration performance common. When some vibration modes in the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making other vibration modes in the vibration performance common. For example, if the vibration intensities in the vibration effects are different, the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by standardizing the vibration cycles in the vibration effects. If some of the light emission patterns in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing other light emission patterns in the light emission effects. For example, if the light emission colors in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing the light emission cycles in the light emission effects. The control burden can also be reduced by similar standardization for the vibration patterns of special vibration effects and the light emission patterns of specific light emission effects.

In addition to or instead of during execution of the variable display, when the game is controlled to any game state such as a small win game state or a big win game state, the operation unit performance or the specific linked performance may be executable. For example, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of the V winning attacker opening, the opening time, the number of openings, or the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. When the game is controlled to a big win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the big win game state, the end condition, the presence or absence of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the big win game state, and the increase amount. Specific linked performance may be executed in conjunction with specific performances such as moving objects, image display, and music playback in the small win game state or the big win game state.

The specific effect capable of executing a specific linked effect may be any effect that can be executed in response to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, when a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, the specific linked effect may be executable during some or all of the effect period.

When controlled to any presentation state, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations. For example, when controlled to a presentation state that is a special presentation mode, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations at a higher rate than when controlled to a presentation state that is a presentation mode other than the special presentation mode.

The operating member capable of executing effects by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects the operation of a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects the touch operation or pressing operation on a touch panel. In addition, a sensor that can detect a predetermined motion by the player, such as an infrared sensor, ultrasonic sensor, CCD sensor, or CMOS sensor, may be used. The motion of the player may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands, etc. using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can detect the predetermined motion of the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be used. In addition to such a motion detection member, a contact member that the player can contact with his/her hand, etc. may be provided, and the contact member may be vibrated or illuminated together with or separately from the motion detection member.

The vibration effects included in the operation unit performance may correspond to the vibration effect in the characteristic part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK, and the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit performance, the vibration effect included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit performance, the vibration effect included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effects included in the operation unit performance may correspond to the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect in the characteristic part 48AK, the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK, and the light emission effect associated with the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01 to AKT03, which is the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The special vibration effect included in the specific linked effect may correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a big win symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time will be saved.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to hold the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to hold the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area is considered to be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for a time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving symbols may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be determined may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be determined.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player includes an operating means operable by a player, a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and a light-emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating means emits light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern. The fact that the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, in the light colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be common between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common, for example, when the light emission color is white. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11 or AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a text image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing, and is capable of executing a vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute a visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a vibration effect execution means that can execute a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a light-emitting effect execution means that can execute a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect in accordance with the progress of a game, the proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed, the proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the vibration effect execution means can execute a special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration state differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko game machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the operation unit effect control pattern or the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light-emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, the reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the performance process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher rate of control to an advantageous state when a predetermined vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to an operation unit performance pattern. The different rate of control to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the use of the operation unit performance pattern. The ability to execute a special vibration performance may be, for example, execution of a vibration performance in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05. The different vibration modes between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11 or AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the different vibration mode may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., different from the vibration patterns AKV21, AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a predetermined vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a text image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode corresponding to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode corresponding to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode corresponding to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing, and is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The execution of the predetermined vibration effect may have a higher rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the execution of the specific effect. Here, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation rate of 50% or more, which is higher than the execution of the reach effect of SP Reach A.
In such a configuration, the player's anticipation for the specified vibration effects can be heightened, improving his/her interest in the game.

The specific effect execution means may execute an effect of moving a movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect execution means may execute a special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notification of a confirmed jackpot, etc. The special vibration effect in response to this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44, etc.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The light emission effect execution means can execute a specific light emission effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with a special vibration effect, and the light emission effect associated with a predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emission effect associated with a special vibration effect may have different light emission modes. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission modes may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, different from when the light emission color changes from blue or gold, or from blue to red and then to gold.
According to such a configuration, the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A limiting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when the operation unit effect is determined in step AKS202.
According to this configuration, the vibration effects can be appropriately executed to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a vibration effect execution means that can execute a first vibration effect and a second vibration effect as vibration effects that vibrate the operating means, and a light-emitting effect execution means that can execute a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect, and the timing of execution of the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are different, and the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission performance may be, for example, the lighting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light emission performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is different according to the light emission state of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the timing of execution is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a pre-variation start timing AKT01 to AKT03 that is different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The fact that the vibration mode is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 that is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a case where the light emission color included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when the developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached the reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a second vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the second vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the second vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing, and is capable of executing the second vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. The case where it is possible to execute the gaze guidance effect at the second timing may be, for example, the case of timing T3 or T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory may be, for example, a variable display that is a pre-variable.

The light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the first vibration performance includes a first vibration light emission mode and a second vibration light emission mode different from the first vibration light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the first vibration performance may be different when the light emission performance is performed in the first vibration light emission mode and when the light emission performance is performed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the first vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission performance associated with the first vibration performance and the light emission performance associated with the second vibration performance. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous performance pattern, the light emission color of the operation unit performance pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0".
In such a configuration, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each of the features 48AK to 50AK may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to the player, and that includes an operation means (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and a vibration effect execution means ( For example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern or the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203, and a light-emitting performance execution means that can execute a light-emitting performance (for example, light-emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 with a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration performance (for example, light control data of the operation unit performance control pattern that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203). and a specific performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 which executes a performance process during variable display in step S172 based on a variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing specific performances (e.g., a reach performance of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game, and the rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., a jackpot reliability according to an operation unit performance pattern, etc.) when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed, and The proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the appearance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the purpose of the operation unit performance pattern, etc.), the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.),
A predetermined vibration effect can be executed at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state,
moreover,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
Examples of such gaming machines include one in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a specified period than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the specified period.
According to this configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

In other words, it is possible to draw attention to the light emission mode that has a high probability of controlling a specific vibration effect to an advantageous state, whether it is executed at the execution timing of a vibration effect, and whether a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific effect, thereby increasing interest in the game, and since the player will pay attention to the effects in the hope that a moving body effect will be executed when a pseudo moving body display effect is executed, interest in the effects can be increased. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is likely to attract the interest of players and increase interest in the effects when installed in an amusement facility.

In addition, vibration effects or light emission effects may be performed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body. This allows for more suitable effects to be performed, increasing the interest.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher when the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance in a predetermined period than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. An example of this gaming machine will be described below as another example.

(Other examples)

The following describes the form for implementing the gaming machine according to this invention with reference to the drawings.

(Feature 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are a common direction (for example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are a common downward direction).
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 16-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can produce an impressive effect that is faster than the movement of the movable body, giving the player a sense of surprise.

The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5),
The pseudo movable body display is a display simulating a movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that undergoes a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement when moved from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vertically moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5 between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position),
The pseudo-movable body display performs a recoil movement display of a specific amount of movement when it is moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion that performs a recoil movement display (bouncing display) of a specific amount of movement when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position).
The specific movement amount is greater than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 16-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without actually mounting a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 3 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A pseudo-movable body display performance in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position);
A movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period (for example, during a variable display period of a pattern based on a fluctuation pattern of a super reach β or a super reach γ, when a development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and a development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. See FIG. 16-11).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The gaming machine of form 4 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 on the image display device 5 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect A that predicts the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot) that suggests that the pseudo-movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by being displayed;
A notification effect that notifies the player of advantageous content (for example, a development effect B that notifies the player of the development of a strong super reach effect);
A predetermined presentation (e.g., a development suggestion presentation suggesting the possibility that the development presentation B will be executed) that is executed before the notification presentation and suggests that the notification presentation will be executed by displaying a notification-related image (e.g., a character image Z310) related to the notification presentation;
It is possible to execute
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) having different expectations for the execution of the notification performance,
The display means is
In the special suggestion performance, the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 16-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed at the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position (see Figs. 16-26(A) to (J), Fig. 16-27(A)),
When the pseudo-movable body display displayed at the second display position is hidden before the notification performance is executed, the notification-related image (e.g., character image Z310) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figs. 16-26(F) to (J), Fig. 16-27(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the specified performance, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the pseudo-movable body display moving in the same way as a movable body, and the image is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion that the notification performance will be executed.

The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position, or a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a deciding effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state);
A specific effect (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies the player that a deciding effect will be executed) that suggests that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed;
It is possible to execute
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the special performance (for example, the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 16-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 16-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, before a special effect is executed, the pseudo-movable body display is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, prioritizing the display of the suggestive image over moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion that a special effect will be executed, while during the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position),
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position;
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 16-40 (A) to (C));
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered) can be displayed (see FIG. 16-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
The display means is capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position, and a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 16-16(B) );
The second pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 16-16(C) );
The display means is
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position (see FIGS. 16-40(A) to 16-40(C));
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 16-40 (A) to (C));
The speed of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is different from the speed of the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position. See FIG. 16-40).
The proportion of the first pseudo movable body display being controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position and when the second pseudo movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, in the preview performance B, when the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or the pattern PBY-4 in which the second initial display position is moved to the second performance display position is executed, the proportion of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is different when the pattern PBY-1 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the pattern PBY-2 in which the second specific performance display position is executed. See FIG. 16-10 and FIG. 16-20 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display or the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state by the difference in the speed of their moving display.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
A movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can move from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a certain amount of recoil motion is performed (see FIG. 16-36 ).
When the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 16-36 ).
The specific amount of movement is greater than the fixed amount of movement (for example, the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 16-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without actually mounting a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
A movable body (e.g., a mounted movable body 32) that can move from a first position (e.g., an origin position) to a second position (e.g., a performance position) different from the first position,
A distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g., a moving display distance L2) is longer than a distance from the first position to the second position (e.g., a moving distance L1) (see FIG. 16-16 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display moves faster and travels a longer distance than the movable body, providing a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
The pseudo-movable body display includes a performance display unit (e.g., performance display unit Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (e.g., mechanism display unit Z100B, Z200B),
In the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position earlier than the performance display unit (see FIG. 16-36 (B1) (B2)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth aspects,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 16-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
A period during which the movable body moves between the first position and the second position includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases (see FIG. 16-39(A) );
The moving display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 16-39(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the pseudo movable body display can be displayed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth aspects,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of illuminating the light-emitting display unit when the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed to the second display position (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first performance position. See FIG. 16-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display that has been moved to the second display position.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to thirteenth aspects,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not cause the light-emitting display unit to emit light when the pseudo movable body display is being moved (see FIG. 16-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the (incomplete) pseudo movable object display during the movement display less noticeable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth or fourteenth aspect,
The movable body includes a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the display means moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display to the second display position, the display means performs the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit in a manner common to the illumination of the light-emitting unit (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position. See FIG. 16-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventeenth aspects,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a second specific initial display position to a second intermediate performance display position or a second specific performance display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position is different from the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first special display position to the second special display position (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A is different from the rightward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position in the preview performance B. See FIG. 16-33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a single pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving from a number of display positions, providing the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixteenth aspects,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in a direction different from the direction in which the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position after the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (see FIG. 16-43 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

Figure 13 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 13 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 13 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 13(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 13(A).

As shown in FIG. 13(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 13(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 14, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability bonus state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the game state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same rate for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from excessively increasing gambling nature. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each setting value, it is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 regarding the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 15, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S90175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the mounted movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of this invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing this invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing this invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 16-1 to 16-40. In the following, the components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description, or components having similar functions but different shapes or positions, etc., will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions will be omitted, and the differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 16-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG has a mounted movable body 32 that is slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 16-2, a vibration motor 61 built into the stick controller 31A is connected to the performance control board 12, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of turning the button LED 62 on and off.

Figure 16-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 16-3 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 16-3 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16-3(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command 9000 (H) is a presentation control command (initialization command: power-on command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9200 (H) is a presentation control command (power outage recovery command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed after a temporary halt. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sends a power outage recovery command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and sends an initialization command if not.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of a customer waiting demo performance, and as described below, is a command sent by the demo display setting that is executed when neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory exists in the normal processing of special symbols, and the customer waiting demo performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent.

The commands shown in FIG. 16-3(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 16-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 16-4, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, as described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 16-5 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In this embodiment, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 16-5(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result judgment table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result judgment table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a number (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment is assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result judgment table 2, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a judgment value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no judgment value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 16-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 16-6 (B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, resulting in a transition to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, resulting in a transition to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, resulting in a transition to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game of "Probable jackpot C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not specifically shown, the small win game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 16-7), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this embodiment) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A", which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 16-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the invention is not limited to this. Similar to the super reach fluctuation pattern, multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ..., and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the invention is not limited to this. The super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the variation pattern in this embodiment also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in FIG. 16-7, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. In addition, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns is set to be longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period of the super reach α variation pattern (50 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but this invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 16-8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display being executed, and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-8(A), when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, when the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or a probability jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 16-8 (A), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 497 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be a Super Reach fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, and Super Reach β is more likely to be determined than Super Reach α, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table C, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss," based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, etc., the variable display is executed more frequently using a shortened variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1), making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 16-8 (B), when the variable display result in the high base state is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, in the low base state, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot A or sure-win jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 16-8(B), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach β or Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 80 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the high base state (time-saving state), the variable display is executed more frequently using the shortening variable pattern (PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach miss variable pattern (PA1-1) due to the time-saving state, so it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot while preventing the game from becoming protracted. Note that the variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ) are variable patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time-saving state).

In this embodiment, the RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 16-2 has a performance control data holding area that holds various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting a start winning reception command buffer in which entries capable of storing data such as a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number notification command are set in association with buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the first special chart, buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the first special chart, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the second special chart, and buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the second special chart are stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section. When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, four commands, namely, a start winning designation command (first start winning port designation command or second start winning port designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The four commands that make up this set - the start port winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending memory count notification command - are stored in the entry for the buffer number that corresponds to the start port winning designation command and the pending memory count notification command.

The contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended. Similarly, the contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "2-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "2-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended.

When a first start winning entry is made, the performance control CPU 120 stores the commands in the start winning entry reception command buffer from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entries among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4, and when a second start winning entry is made, it stores the commands in the start winning entry reception command buffer from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entries among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. When a start winning entry is made, the start winning entry designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start winning entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers "1" to "4" corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory or the second special pattern reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning reception command buffer are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is finished, the commands stored in buffer number "1-0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1-1" are shifted to buffer number "1-0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1-2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1-1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(Super Reach Effects)
Here, the effects during the super reach will be described with reference to Fig. 16-9. Fig. 16-9 is a diagram showing the execution periods of various effects during normal reaches and super reaches.

As shown in FIG. 16-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display and then performs a normal reach performance as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the normal reach display mode. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing a normal reach performance, it performs a super reach performance (weak super reach performance or strong super reach performance) as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the super reach display mode, and ends the variable display of decorative symbols after the super reach performance ends.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute preview presentation A or preview presentation B, which notifies the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, as a presentation different from the variable display presentation in a normal reach presentation in a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ). The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute development presentation A, which notifies the player that a normal reach presentation in a super reach fluctuation pattern will develop into a weak super reach presentation (content advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a development suggestion presentation that suggests the possibility of executing a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player), and can execute a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a deciding presentation that notifies the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in the strong super reach presentation in the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ).

In this way, in a normal reach miss variation pattern, the normal reach performance will not develop into a weak super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot or miss, in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance, and in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), the weak super reach performance will develop into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, Super Reach α is a weak Super Reach with a higher expectation than a normal reach, and Super Reach β and γ are strong Super Reach with a higher expectation than a weak Super Reach (jackpot expectation: normal reach < Super Reach α < Super Reach β < Super Reach γ).

In addition, normal reaches and super reaches α, β, and γ may each have a different type of normal reach effect or super reach effect, or they may have a common or at least partially similar type of super reach effect. In addition, the types of super reaches are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the feature section 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A and preview performance B, development performance A and B, development suggestion performance, and deciding performance, it is possible to move the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, and to move and display the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display described below. Therefore, before explaining the specific content of each performance, the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Pachinko machine development process)
First, in order to understand the circumstances under which the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display were mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to Fig. 16-12. Fig. 16-12 is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 16-12, when development of a given pachinko gaming machine (such as Pachinko gaming machine 1) begins, a proposal is first prepared that clearly defines what is to be communicated to gaming establishments and players, and what the developer wants them to feel (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation configuration such as reaches, board configuration, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the machine are considered.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (first prototype, design mockup) of the board (game board), images and materials that allow for an image of variable displays, a spec confirmation sheet, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage when this prototype is created, for example, although it was planned to have multiple movable bodies, problems may arise that make it impossible to mount multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space due to interference with other movable bodies, cost, durability, etc.).

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, for the effect images, a pseudo-movable body display image is created that imitates the non-mounted movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem that arose in step 241SGS002. Note that since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display has less impact than when the non-mounted movable body is moved, for example, the reaction display movement when the moving display is stopped and the speed of the moving display are often deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the game board (game board) including images of variable displays and effects is created, and the variable displays, core effects, and the operation of the movable bodies are checked (step 241SGS004). If there are no problems, a mold product of the game board (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide an impactful performance to the player, the performance effect can be further enhanced and the performance can be diversified, but in reality, it is often difficult to install multiple bodies due to various problems such as those mentioned above. Therefore, it is becoming common to use the movement display of a pseudo-movable body display that imitates the non-installed movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be installed.

In the following, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, multiple movable bodies were planned to be mounted during the development stage, but due to the occurrence of various problems as described above, it was decided to mount one movable body (e.g., mounted movable body 32), and the mounting of the other movable bodies (e.g., first non-mounted movable body M100, second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and they were left unmounted, so it will be described as follows: instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a moving display of a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a moving display of a second pseudo movable body display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are adopted.

In the above, the pseudo-movable body display is exemplified as a form in which it is adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 that were ultimately not mounted, but the invention is not limited to this, and there are also cases in which it was possible to mount a movable body, but the pseudo-movable body display is used deliberately to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or planned to be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounted movable body 32 will be described below with reference to Fig. 16-13. Fig. 16-13 (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram explaining a state in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 16-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of a performance section 32A formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section 32B. The left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B, which are extended from the performance section 32A to the left and right, respectively, are supported by drive mechanisms 201L, 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, allowing it to move vertically between an upper origin position (the origin position shown by a solid line in FIG. 16-13(A)) and a performance position below the origin position (the position shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 16-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L, 201R to the performance section 32A.

The driving mechanism 201L, 201R mainly includes a mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driving gear 203L, 203R fixed to the driving shaft of the mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driven gear 204L, 204R meshing with the driving gear 203L, 203R, a vertically facing rotating shaft 205L, 205R with the driven gear 204L, 204R fixed to the lower end, a moving body 206L, 206R inserted into the rotating shaft 205L, 205R, a mounted movable body solenoid 207L, 207R capable of holding the mounted movable body 32 at the origin position, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see Figure 16-2) built into the performance unit 32A and capable of illuminating a light-emitting unit 208A consisting of the letter "X" (see Figure 16-2).

The left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism 32B of the mounted movable body 32 are inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are retained in the origin position by being locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on while the mounted movable body 32 is retained in the origin position and the locked state is released, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position due to its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism 32B come into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R, restricting downward movement, so that the mounted movable body 32 stops at the performance position.

While a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R have an engagement portion (not shown) formed on the inner periphery that can be engaged with the groove 205A, and the rotation around the rotating shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, so that the rotating shafts 205L and 205R are rotated forward and backward by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R to move in the vertical direction. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the performance position by its own weight, and after falling, as shown in FIG. 16-13 (B), the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shafts 205L and 205R to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies rise from the performance position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 16-14. Fig. 16-14 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display (A) and a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body (B).

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 shown in Figure 16-14 (A) is an image that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figure 16-14 (B).

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a performance section M100A formed in a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section M100B. The left side of the mechanism section M100B, which extends leftward from the performance section M100A, is supported by a drive mechanism M101 located on the left side of the image display device 5, so that it can move vertically between a first origin position above (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 16-14 (B)) and a first performance position below the first origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 16-14 (B)).

The drive mechanism M101 mainly comprises a movable body motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, a driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, a vertically oriented rotating shaft M105 with the driven gear M104 fixed to its lower end, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) built into the performance section M100A and capable of illuminating a circular light-emitting section M108A when viewed from the front.

The performance unit M100A has striped decorations on the front and four performance movable parts M110A to M110D arranged around the light-emitting unit M108A, and can be changed between a first performance state (shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 16-14 (B)) in which the performance movable parts M110A to M110D are close to each other, and a second performance state in which the performance movable parts M110A to M110D move radially away from the light-emitting unit M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is inserted (guided) in a vertically movable manner on the rotation axis M105 at the left end (guided part) of the mechanism M100B, and is held at the first origin position by being engaged with the movable body solenoid M107. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on while held at the first origin position and the engaged state is released, the first non-mounted movable body M100 falls from the first origin position under its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism M100B come into contact with the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that the first non-mounted movable body M100 stops at the first performance position.

In addition, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation axis M105, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove M105A is formed on the inner periphery of the moving body M106, and rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, so that the moving body M106 can move up and down by rotating the rotation axis M105 forward and backward by the moving body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted moving body M100 can fall by its own weight from the first origin position to the first performance position, and after falling, the moving body M106 rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position by rotating the rotation axis M105 by the moving body motor M102 to raise the moving body M106, and is held at the first origin position by the moving body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 16-14(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is an image that imitates the above-mentioned first non-mounted movable body M100, and has a performance display part Z100A corresponding to the performance part M100A, a mechanism display part Z100B corresponding to the mechanism part M100B, and a light-emitting display part Z108A corresponding to the light-emitting part M108A. The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position (see FIG. 16-16(B)), and is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to a position different from the first performance position (see FIG. 16-17(A)). Additionally, the performance section M100A has performance movable display sections Z110A-Z110D corresponding to the performance movable sections M110A-M110D, and is capable of changing between a first performance display state corresponding to a first performance state and a second performance display state corresponding to a second performance state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 16-15. Fig. 16-15 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body (B).

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 shown in Figure 16-15 (A) is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figures 16-15 (B) and (C).

Note that, for the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 16-15(B) and mounting plan 2 shown in FIG. 16-15(C)) were devised at the beginning of development. However, due to development reasons, it became impossible to mount the second non-mounted movable body itself, so the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 was made capable of executing a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 1, which will be described below, and a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 2.

As shown in Figures 16-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a performance section M200A formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front side, and a mechanical section M200B, and is incorporated into a first performance device (mounting plan 1: see Figure 16-15 (B)) in which the lower end of the mechanical section M100B is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A arranged below the image display device 5, and a second performance device (mounting plan 2: see Figure 16-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanical section M100B is supported by a second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 16-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A has a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, a rotating body M203 rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and a guide rail M204 that guides the performance unit M200A so that it can move up and down. One end of the mechanism unit M200B is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis facing in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base member M202, and a long hole M206 is formed into which a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral portion on the front side of the rotating body M203 is slidably inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A can be moved vertically between a first specific origin position below (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 16-15 (B)) and a first specific performance position above the first specific origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 16-15 (B)) by rotating the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotating the mechanism part M200B about the rotation axis.

The performance unit M200A also has a rotating unit M207 that is circular when viewed from the front, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) that can illuminate multiple (e.g., five) light-emitting units M208A-M208E provided on the rotating unit M207. As the rotating unit M207 rotates, the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up, causing the light-emitting units M208A-M208E to emit light in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors).

As shown in FIG. 16-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B mainly comprises a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, a driven gear M214 meshing with the drive gear M213, and a rotation shaft M215 facing left and right with the driven gear M214 fixed to its left end. A spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, while a mechanism part M200B extending upward from the performance part M200A has a locking part (not shown) formed on its inner periphery that can be locked into the groove M215A, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B can be moved left and right between a second specific origin position on the left side (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 16-15(C)) and a second specific performance position on the right side (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 16-15(C)) by rotating the rotation shaft M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, and can be stopped at a second intermediate performance position halfway between the second specific origin position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 16-15(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200, and has a performance display section Z200A corresponding to the performance section M200A, a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to the mechanism section M200B, a rotation display section Z207 corresponding to the rotation section M207, and light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E corresponding to the light-emitting sections M208A-M208E.

Incidentally, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown), but due to cost considerations, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED. However, by making it the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is possible to make the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E light up in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors) without considering the cost.

Then, it can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position (see FIG. 16-16 (C)), and can be moved horizontally between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific performance display position corresponding to the second specific performance position (see FIG. 16-17 (B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figures 16-16 and 16-17. Figure 16-16 is a diagram showing (A) the movable range of a non-mounted movable body, (B) the movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. Figure 16-17 is a diagram showing (A) a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 16-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 is movable in the vertical direction between an origin position where the lower part of the performance unit 32A overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance position where the performance unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap approximately in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the movement distance from the origin position to the performance position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 16-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved up and down between a first initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the lower center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 16-17(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the upper center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the specific moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, can not only be displayed by moving vertically within a movable range between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position, but can also be displayed by moving vertically within a specific movable range between a second initial display position not corresponding to the first origin position and a second performance display position not corresponding to the first performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-16(C), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L3.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-17 (B), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved left and right between a second specific initial display position where the right part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, can not only be displayed by moving up and down within a movable range between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position, but can also be displayed by moving left and right within a specific movable range between a second specific initial display position not corresponding to the first specific origin position and a second specific performance display position not corresponding to the first specific performance position.

Furthermore, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is shorter than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 (L2>L1>L3).Furthermore, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 and the movement display distance L2A of the mounted movable body 32 (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving over a longer distance (L2, L2A, L3A) than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, making it possible to realize a more impactful presentation than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIG. 16-16, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are composed of performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B are extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that it appears as if the performance display units Z100A, Z200A are supported by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5, making it possible to express the movement display more realistically.

In other words, a pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) is a display that imitates a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, or a virtual movable body, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see Figure 16-25 (H)).

In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to display a part of the model movable body in a different display manner, or to display a manner that cannot be realized with the model movable body (for example, a deformed or transformed display), or to display movement (for example, a high-speed movement display).

The pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or video created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or video captured of a movable body as an actual structure. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable body displays are displayed moving, a pseudo-impact can be generated by outputting sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects output when the movable body is moved or the impact sound generated when the movable body is stopped, vibrating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A with the vibration motor 61 when the pseudo-movable body display reaches the performance display position, or by outputting deep bass sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, thereby providing the player with a more realistic performance.

Next, the details of the various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 16-10. Figure 16-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and configuration of the various effects in the super reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in Figure 16-10, the preview performance A can be executed when the base state is low, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific performance display position, and then the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E light up in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby indicating the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is erased after being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 16-25 (C) to (F)).

In more detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, when pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red. Therefore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of a jackpot is red. The light-emitting color can be changed in various ways, and when a jackpot is confirmed, the light-emitting display units may be illuminated in gold or rainbow colors, etc.

(Preview Performance B)
The preview performance B is executable when the base state is high, and the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot is indicated depending on whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, or whether the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first performance display position to the first initial display position (see Figures 16-34 (A) to (C)). The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second performance display position to the second initial display position (see Figures 16-34 (D) to (F)).

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 16-33 (A) to (C)). The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 16-33 (D) to (F)).

In detail, in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described below, if pattern PYB-1 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position, if pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position, if pattern PYB-3 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and if pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner than when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the moving display pattern with the highest probability of a jackpot is the pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner from the second initial display position to the second performance display position.

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position faster than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

(Development A)
In the development performance A, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 16-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the performance position, rises from the performance position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has passed.

In more detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 dropping from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing (see FIG. 16-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position at the performance start timing, and the development to a weak super reach is announced by the display of a development announcement image Z300 on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 16-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is decided in which the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped and the development announcement image Z300 is displayed to announce the development to a weak super reach.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but unlike pseudo-movable body displays such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which are displayed and move in the same way as the movable body, it is an image (display) that imitates only the performance section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode that differs from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the performance start timing, it is displayed from the beginning at a performance display position that corresponds to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32, without any movement display.

(Development suggestion)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and after the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position, when a rapid-fire operation of the push button 31B by the player (an operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a specified period) is detected during an effective operation period in which the rapid-fire operation is effective, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E change to an illuminated display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, thereby suggesting the display color of the character image Z310 described below, i.e., the possibility that the development effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the effective operation period during which the repeated operation of the push button 31B is valid in the development suggestion performance, an operation promotion image (such as an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not displayed on the image display device 5, and instead the button LED 62 (see FIG. 16-2) built into the push button 31B is turned on to promote the repeated operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B during the effective operation period may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is displayed so that the character image Z310 related to the model overlaps (acts on) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position in the display area of the image display device 5, and then is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 16-26 (A) to (J), Figure 16-27 (A)).

In more detail, in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, if pattern PS-1 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, if pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, if pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and if pattern PS-4 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green to red in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E with the highest execution expectation of development performance B will be red.

The light color and the pattern of change in light color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the light color may be other than white from the beginning. In addition, the number of lit light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E may be increased in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, so that a higher number of lit light-emitting parts increases the expectation of the development performance B being executed compared to a lower number of lit light-emitting parts. The expectation may also differ depending on the light color and the number of lights.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or when the amount of the repeated operation is small, even if one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the illumination color does not change depending on the amount of the repeated operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or when the amount of the repeated operation is small, the illumination color may change to the illumination color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is displayed in a color that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, different types of character images Z310 may be displayed depending on the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period ends. Even if the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E does not change despite the fact that one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 has been determined as described above, a character image Z310 (a color different from the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E) in a color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 may be displayed. Furthermore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development B)
In the development performance B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, thereby informing the player that the performance will develop into a strong super reach performance and a deciding performance will be executed (content advantageous to the player) (see FIG. 16-27(D)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 16-27(D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title image Z51 is displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner indicating that the display of the image has started, thereby suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot (it will be controlled to a jackpot game state).

In more detail, when execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280 described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, thereby notifying the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 16-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, and the image display device 5 displays the reach title image Z51 in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 16-27 (C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process, a performance pattern is determined in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach.

(Decisive performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between the ally character and the enemy character that was being executed in the super reach performance, and notifies the player whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot. Specifically, for example, after a display is made in which the ally character deals a final blow to the enemy character, a display is made to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation effective period ends, either a jackpot confirmation notification is made in which the enemy character is defeated by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and the player wins the battle, or a loss confirmation notification is made in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position, and the player is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a miss, and a confirmed miss notification is made in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle, while patterns KB-2 and KV-2 are selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a confirmed jackpot notification is made in which the friendly character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A being detected, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (e.g., about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if the execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the mounted movable body 32 falls, and a jackpot confirmation notification is made, and after returning from the effect position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, and the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 16-29 (E) to (G), Figures 16-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the mounted movable body 32 will not move from the origin position at the timing when it falls, and an effect image Z57 of cracked glass will be displayed to notify the user of a confirmed miss, and the variable display result will be a miss (see Figures 16-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and development performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figure 16-11. Figure 16-11 is a diagram showing the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A and development performance B.

As shown in Figure 16-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach), pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is not executed and development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which development effect A and development effect B are both executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C < pattern D. In other words, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, when the development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A is executed without executing the development performance B. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A and the development performance B are not executed.

Figure 16-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 15. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, in step 241SGS271, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small jackpot. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three symbols are aligned as even numbers as the stopping symbols. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stopping symbols are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the stopping symbols are determined to be decorative patterns in which three symbols are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns).

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). If it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; Y), it executes the preview performance type determination process shown in FIG. 16-19 to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the preview performance A or the preview performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and executes the development performance A type determination process shown in FIG. 16-21 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). If it is not a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), it proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 16-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines whether the game state is in a low base state (time-saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), it extracts a random number for determining the advance effect, and determines the effect pattern of the advance effect A using the advance effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 16-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in a low base state, that is, if it is in a high base state (step 241SGS302; N), it extracts a random number for determining the advance effect, and determines the effect pattern of the advance effect B using the advance effect type determination table B shown in FIG. 16-20 (B) (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 16-20 (A), in the table for determining the type of preview performance A, for each of "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 16-20 (A) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYA-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 16-20 (B), in the table for determining the type of preview performance B, for each of "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 16-20 (B) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYB-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the preview performance type A for a low base state and the table for determining the preview performance type B for a high base state, but this invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different in the table for determining the preview performance type A and the table for determining the preview performance type B.

Returning to FIG. 16-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, where the preview performance start waiting timer is set to the period until the performance starts (step 241SGS306), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-21, in the development performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small jackpot) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the development performance A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of the probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 16-21 (B) (step 241SGS312).

As shown in Figure 16-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance A, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 16-21 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 10 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 90 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a super reach, a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a normal reach, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "not execute". In other words, when a normal reach is a miss, it does not develop into a weak super reach performance, so development performance A is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the variable display results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is higher when development performance A is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 16-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the type of advanced performance A determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, where the advanced performance A start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS314), and the process ends.

Returning to Figure 16-18, after executing the processing of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), it executes the development suggestion performance type determination processing shown in Figure 16-22 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), executes the development performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 16-23 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and executes the deciding performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 16-24 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the deciding performance in the variable display (step 241SGS282). If it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), proceed to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 16-22 (A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion performance, and determines the performance pattern of the development suggestion performance using the development suggestion performance type determination table shown in Figure 16-22 (B) (step 241SGS322).

As shown in Figure 16-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance, different judgment values are assigned to each of "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" when the variable display result is a sure chance jackpot (either sure chance jackpot A, sure chance jackpot B, or sure chance jackpot C), when it is a non-sure chance jackpot, when it is a super reach miss, or when it is a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 16-20 (A) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss, "Pattern PS-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 16-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the type of development suggestion effect determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where the development suggestion effect start waiting timer is set to the period until the effect starts (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-23(A), in the development performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result can be identified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small jackpot) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the advanced performance and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance B using the table for determining the advanced performance B type shown in FIG. 16-23 (B) (step 241SGS332).

As shown in Figure 16-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance B, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 16-23 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 20 judgment values are assigned to "no execution" and 80 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "no execution" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach β or γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to "no execution" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach α, 100 judgment values are assigned to "no execution". In other words, when Super Reach α is a miss, it does not develop into a strong Super Reach performance, so development performance B is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach or normal reach is missed, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is higher when development performance B is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 16-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the type of advanced performance B determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, where the advanced performance B start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS334), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 16-24(A), in the process of determining the type of final effect, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect determines the pattern of the final effect using the table for determining the type of final effect shown in FIG. 16-24(B) based on the variable display result identified in step 241SGS301 (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined type of final effect is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the timer waiting for the start of the final effect is set to the period until the start of the effect (step 241SGS343), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 16-24(B), in the deciding effect type determination table, for "Pattern KB-1" and "Pattern KB-2" which enable the operation of the push button 31B and display an operation prompt to encourage the player to press the push button 31B once, and for "Pattern KV-1" and "Pattern KV-2" which enable the operation of the stick controller 31A and display an operation prompt to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A once, different judgment values are assigned to the variable display results when the variable display results in a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), when the variable display results in a non-special jackpot, or when the super reach is missed, so that the judgment value numbers shown in FIG. 16-24(B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a miss for the Super Reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-1".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if a sure-win occurs in the variable display, "Pattern KV-1" in which the control object is the stick controller 31A is determined most frequently, if a sure-win occurs but a non-sure-win occurs, "Pattern KB-2" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently, and if a super reach is missed, "Pattern KB-1" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently. In other words, the probability of a sure-win is higher when the stick controller 31A is the control object than when the push button 31B is the control object. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the random number for determining the preview performance, the random number for determining the development performance A, the random number for determining the development hint performance, the random number for determining the development performance B, and the random number for determining the final performance are each set to random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and one of the values in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various performance determination random numbers is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but this invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various performance determination random numbers can be determined appropriately. Also, a performance determination random number counter for generating these various performance determination random numbers is set in RAM 122, and this performance determination random number counter is updated at each timer interruption in the random number update process. Also, a common random number may be used for these various performance determination random numbers.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, an example of determining the performance pattern of various performances in the various performance type determination process has been given, but this invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above-mentioned performances, it is also possible to determine the execution of preview performances such as a character preview performance in which a character appears, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes in stages, and a group preview in which a group of specified characters crosses the display area.When determining these different types of preview performances, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the type of preview performance, so a different period depending on the type of preview performance can be set in the preview performance start waiting timer described below.

Returning to FIG. 16-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 241SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 241SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (step 241SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data being variably displayed, including image data showing the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, which then displays an image corresponding to the signal. This realizes the variable display of the decorative patterns and the display of videos of other performances.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting processing (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β performance)
Next, a description will be given of an example of the performance of the Super Reach β based on FIG. 16-25 to FIG. 16-31. FIG. 16-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the Super Reach β mainly in the normal reach. FIG. 16-26 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 16-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 16-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. FIG. 16-29 (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. FIG. 16-30 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance after the big win confirmation notification. FIG. 16-31 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. FIG. 16-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, we will explain various examples of performance actions during the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β.

As shown in FIG. 16-25(A), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β, which is based on the occurrence of a start winning win. In addition, the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5SL for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "2"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The first and second reserved memory numbers, small symbols, and error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 are displayed in front of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (higher layer), preventing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, the decorative symbols are displayed behind the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (lower layer), preventing the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

After the variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 16-25(B), if the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach presentation starts as a variable display presentation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 16-25(C), at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, then moves it to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 16-25(D)), and as shown in FIG. 16-25(E), the light-emitting display units Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1-4) determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278A, thereby executing the preview performance A that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In addition, an effect image Z60 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and has a small display size, and when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red based on pattern PYA-4, the effect image Z60 is red and preferably has a large display size according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-25 (F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, thereby ending the preview performance A. After that, a reduced decorative pattern is displayed in a slightly larger form than the small pattern in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5.

If it is decided not to execute development performance A in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 16-25(G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped but is kept in the origin position, and a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance. If it is decided to execute development performance A, as shown in FIG. 16-25(H), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R are turned on, and the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the drop of the mounted movable body 32 is executed as development performance A than when it is not executed, but even if it has been decided not to execute development performance A (drop of the mounted movable body 32), the development notification image Z300 can be displayed to notify that the performance will progress to a weak super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 16-26 (A), after the execution period of development performance A ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach performance by displaying the character image Z310, and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and then moves and displays it at the first specific performance display position, starting the development suggestion performance (see FIG. 16-26 (B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed so that a part of it overlaps with the front side of the character image Z310.

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved to the first specific display position as a development suggestion effect, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in white, and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit up to encourage the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200. Then, if one of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. 16-26(D), the effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the number of repeated taps of the push button 31B during the effective operation period (the number of operations detected), and the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined time has passed, thereby indicating that development performance B will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 16-26(E), even after the effective operation period has ended, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is maintained, and the background image is darkened to display a blackout. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 is displayed in the upper position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same color as the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period has ended, and an effect image Z63 for highlighting the character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 16-26(F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 16-26(G)), a medium-sized character image Z310 is then displayed (see FIG. 16-26(H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 16-26(I)), and then a large-sized character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 16-26(J)).

In addition, in Figures 16-26 (E) to (J), taking into consideration the appearance of the presentation, it is preferable to continue the illumination of the illumination display units Z208A to Z208E, but not display the effect image Z62.

In this way, the character image Z310, which is the same color as the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E, is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size from the back of the screen to the front, and when small, medium, and large sized character images Z310 are displayed, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 16-26 (J) in FIG. 16-27, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is overlapped with at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be seen through the overlapping area, thereby more effectively building up anticipation for the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, because the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the display of the character image Z310 can appropriately suggest that development performance B will be executed, while diverting the player's attention from the fact that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position.

In addition, while the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size, it may also be displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. In addition, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-27(A), while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is hidden by being gradually faded out as a display to emphasize that it has been erased. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being gradually faded out.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which, as shown in FIG. 16-27(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, but the invention is not limited to this, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 may be erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the character image Z310 is being displayed when the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, as shown in FIG. 16-26(F).

Furthermore, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to being erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, but may be erased (hidden) by moving the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while fading out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16-27(B), at the start timing of the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if it is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS281 that development performance B will not be executed, as shown in FIG. 16-27(C), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined form (for example, a form at the start of display with high transparency and low visibility), thereby announcing that the development will progress to a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-27(D), when it is decided to execute the development performance B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position to notify that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) when moving, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. In addition, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 16-27 (D) are different from the development suggestion effects and do not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, but are light-emitting display colors that correspond to the colors of the effect images Z65, etc., displayed on the image display device 5 as images of the weak reach effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-27(E), the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined state (for example, a state at the start of display in which the transmittance is high and the visibility is low), and then, as shown in FIG. 16-27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (not displayed) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reach title indicating the type of super reach performance and a reach title image Z51 indicating the expected jackpot probability, and notifies the player that the performance has progressed to the super reach performance. Next, the super reach performance (for example, a performance displaying an image Z52 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle (confront)) is started (see FIG. 16-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the super reach display mode was set, if the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the push button 31B, an operation prompting image Z53 is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 16-28(C). On the other hand, if patterns KV-1 and KV-2 have been determined in the final performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the object of operation is the stick controller 31A, an operation prompting image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 16-28(D).

When the operation prompt display is displayed during the operation effective period, at the timing when the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting the push operation of the push button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 16-29 (E), a movable body performance is executed in which the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position in front of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in response to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.).

Effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which glass cracks and scatters, and is exemplified in a manner similar to effect image Z71 described below, but the invention is not limited to this, and an effect image in a manner different from effect image Z71 may be used. For example, by displaying only a portion of the glass cracking and scattering into fragments, while leaving the remaining portion intact, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened over some time, even in a situation in which the mounted movable body 32 overlaps with effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5 and the display is difficult to see.

Furthermore, in effect image Z55, similar to effect image Z71 described later, by reflecting a portion of the mounted movable body 32 arranged in front of the image display device 5 in at least one of the multiple glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, thereby realizing a more three-dimensional display.

After that, the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, and then, as shown in FIG. 16-29(F), an image Z56 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, as shown in FIG. 16-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot. Note that even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-30(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and glass fragments scatter in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the performance movable display units Z110A to Z110D are changed from the first performance display state to the second performance display state. In addition, in response to the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., rainbow color) in the same way as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 16-29(E).

Here, the details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position described in Figures 16-30 (A) and (B) are described in Figure 16-31.

As shown in FIG. 16-31(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing glass cracking and scattering into multiple pieces of glass in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. The performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 so that a portion of it is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held in the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-31(B), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased compared to the state shown in FIG. 16-31(A), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in front of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in Figures 16-31 (C) and (D), when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of images Z71A showing glass fragments are further increased than in the state shown in Figure 16-31 (B), and these images Z71A are displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, an effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and only the image Z71A showing glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is displayed moving from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby not only creating a three-dimensional effect with the image Z71A scattering around, but also making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 look as if it were a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 16-31(C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed so as to be visible through one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, or as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 16-31(D), a portion of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be reflected and displayed in one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby making the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A clearer, thereby realizing a display with a more three-dimensional feel.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-31 (D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, then changes the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D from the first performance display state to the second performance display state, and executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 16-32, after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves to the first performance display position, the performance control CPU 120 repeats a blinking display pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated for a first period ta1 to ta2 (e.g., 33 ms) and then hidden for a second period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., 33 ms), while repeating a blinking pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated for a first corresponding period (e.g., 30 ms) corresponding to the first period and then turned off for a second corresponding period (e.g., 40 ms) corresponding to the second period.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, the performance can be more appropriately enhanced. Even if it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time during which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated (e.g., 33 ms) and the time during which the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on (e.g., 30 ms) during the first period ta1-ta2, it is possible to prevent the deviation between the illumination of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 from becoming large over time, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the on period.

In addition, during the performance periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be executed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. In this way, the performance can be made more exciting. The driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light-emitting display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 16-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, ends the reduced display of the decorative symbols, and temporarily stops and displays them in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-30(D), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves upward, and as shown in FIG. 16-30(E), it moves and displays it to the first performance display position and then erases it. Then, the combination of confirmed decorative symbols is stopped and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot, the effect of moving the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is executed, allowing the player to more effectively experience the feeling that the game is being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 16-29, if the variable display result is a miss at the timing when a single push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation effective period in which the operation prompt display is displayed, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 16-29(H), the movable body performance of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the performance position in front of the display area is not executed, and an effect image Z57 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 16-29(I), an image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 16-29(J), a miss pattern combination is displayed as a stop to notify the confirmed miss. Also, the small patterns are displayed as a miss pattern combination in synchronization with the stop display of the miss pattern combination.

For example, a difference in scale will occur between when push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period and when push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period. Therefore, the difference in scale that occurs at the timing of operating push button 31B may be absorbed by extending or shortening any of the following periods: 1. the period during which the decorative pattern shakes until the pattern is determined; 2. the display period of images Z55 to Z58; or 3. the performance period of the movable body performance.

(Example of Super Reach γ performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the Super Reach γ will be described with reference to Fig. 16-33 to Fig. 16-34. Fig. 16-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ. Fig. 16-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance operation of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern. The flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of Super Reach β, so we will not explain it again. Note that Super Reach γ is a fluctuation pattern that is selected only when the game state is in a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 16-33(A), when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second intermediate performance display position (see FIG. 16-33(B)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-33(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 16-33(D), when pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set, and then moving and displaying it at the second specific performance display position (see FIG. 16-33(E)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-33 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 16-34(A), when pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the first performance display position (see FIG. 16-34(B)). In addition, an effect image Z82 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position to highlight the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-34 (C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first performance display position to the first initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 16-34(D), when pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the second initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second performance display position (see FIG. 16-34(E)). In addition, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-34 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second performance display position to the second initial display position.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, the pseudo movable body display and the movable body will be described based on Fig. 16-35 to Fig. 16-40. Fig. 16-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 16-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 16-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 16-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 16-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 16-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display with the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 16-35, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pseudo movable body display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which differs from the mounted movable body 32 in shape, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 16-14 (B), but the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first performance display position and the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 are both positions lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, so the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction of movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position are both downward. In other words, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are both movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in FIG. 16-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position (L2>L1).

As shown in Figures 16-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 takes approximately 300 ms to fall (move) under its own weight from the upper origin position through the intermediate position to the lower performance position, whereas the first pseudo movable body display Z100 takes approximately 100 ms to move from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position to the first performance display position, as shown in Figures 16-35 (A) to (C). In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position has a longer movement display distance and is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position.

In this way, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, can be displayed moving in the same direction from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 as a structure that can move in the same direction as the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., downward), the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position can be made faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from its origin position to its performance position, thereby making it possible to perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 16-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which, when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position that is lower than the first origin position, stops as the mechanical part M100B abuts against the upper part of the movable body M106 and restricts downward movement, and performs a recoil action (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement due to the vibration that occurs when the movement is restricted.

As a result, as shown in Figures 16-36 (A) and (B), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position, it performs a recoil action display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the performance part M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first performance position, the mechanism part M100B abuts against the upper part of the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that a recoil action due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the performance part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the performance part M100A, causing a recoil action.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16-36 (B1), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, it first displays the recoil action of the mechanism unit M100B, and then displays the recoil action of the performance unit M100A, as shown in FIG. 16-36 (B2). By doing this, it is possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, in a more realistic manner (for example, a manner different from the display imitating the mounted movable body 32).

Also, as shown in Figures 16-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 is structured so that the left and right sides of the performance part 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and when it moves to the performance position, the mechanism part 32B comes into contact with the upper parts of the left and right moving bodies 206, restricting downward movement, and a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to the vibrations that occur when the movement is restricted.

Next, we will explain the operation of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body during the final performance.

As explained in Figures 16-28 to 16-30, the performance control CPU 120 executes a movable body performance in which the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position during the execution period of the deciding performance (ta0 to ta10) to notify of a confirmed jackpot, and then executes a pseudo-movable body display in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 16-37(A), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the deciding presentation at timing ta0, and then drops the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the presentation position at timing ta1 when it detects the operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B by the player within the effective operation period. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2, and then performs a recoil action during the period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., about 700 ms).

Then, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the presentation position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is issued. Here, the period TL3 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is longer than the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position. In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the presentation position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to detection of the player's operation, it is possible to give an impact to the player by making it fall quickly under its own weight, while when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by impact by moving it slowly.

Then, at timing ta6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the big win confirmation notification, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position, and during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to timing ta7 (e.g., about 100 ms), moves it from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then performs a recoil action display during the period ta7 to timing ta8 (e.g., about 900 ms).

After that, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, the period TL4 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is longer than the period TL2 (e.g., about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is slower than the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In this way, by making the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position faster than the movement display from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, in the same way as the mounted movable body 32, it is possible to make the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 move in a more realistic manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-37(B), when comparing the amount of movement L2 (movement display distance L2) per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the amount of movement L1A per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position. In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can surprise the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-37(C), the movement amount L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position. Also, the number of times the first pseudo movable body display Z100 displays the recoil action (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the mounted movable body 32 displays the recoil action (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, a performance that leaves an impression on the player can be provided.

Also, as shown in Figures 16-38 (A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is the same as the movement display distance L2 of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position (TL2 < TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position. By doing this, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can create an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-38(C), the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L11 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, and the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. Also, the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 or the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32 or the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a comparison between the first recoil action and the recoil action display, but it may be a comparison between any of the second or subsequent recoil actions and the recoil action display, or a comparison between the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil actions and the total or average movement amount of the recoil action display.

In addition, the recoil action has been exemplified as an action in which the movable body jumps upward due to the reaction when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a specific part of the movable body due to the reaction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-39(A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, or when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first performance position to the first origin position, driving sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, so the performance control CPU 120 increases the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 during a first period from timing tb1 when the movement starts to timing tb2, keeps it constant during a period from timing tb2 to timing tb3, and decreases it during a second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate from the start of movement until the first period has elapsed, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate and stop during a second period just before the stop position.

In contrast, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed is constant from the time tb1 when the movement starts to the time tb4 when the movement stops, as shown in Figure 16-39 (B), and a first period for accelerating the display of the movement and a second period for decelerating the display of the movement are not required, so the display of the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 16-40.

As shown in Figures 16-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first performance display position, are required.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 16-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific performance display position, are required.

As explained in FIG. 16-16, the moving display distance L2 is the moving display distance from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and the moving display distance L3 is the moving display distance L2 from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position. The moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, but the time required to move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is about 100 ms, while the time required to move the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is about 800 ms, so the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, it is possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 16-40(A) and then the second frame shown in FIG. 16-40(C) in that order, but this would result in a low frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 16-40 (B) is inserted between the first and second frames as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position, thereby increasing the number of frames in the video and increasing the frame rate, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is performed in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, thereby enabling a natural and smooth movement display.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving at high speed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, by inserting at least one interpolation frame between the first frame and the second frame to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, it is also possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 16-40 (A') and then the second frame shown in FIG. 16-40 (B'), but this would result in a lower frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, between the first and second frames, multiple interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at multiple first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific performance display position, thereby increasing the number of frames of the video and increasing the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each of the first intermediate display positions, and the first specific performance display position for each display frame, thereby making it possible to display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moving at a slower speed than the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

In addition, for example, in the preview performance B, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, and when pattern PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are controlled to the jackpot game state at different rates can be recognized by the difference in the speed of the movement display.

In addition, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to a jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed, which allows attention to be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, but the invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 16-34 (D) to (E), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second initial display position to the second performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the second performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-33 (A) to (B), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position and stopped at the second intermediate performance display position, or as shown in Figures 16-33 (D) to (E), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position and stopped at the second specific performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate display position or the second specific display position in the preview performance B has a larger amount of movement than the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific display position in the preview performance A. By doing this, the amount of movement in the preview performance B is larger than that of the preview performance A, so that the movement can be displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, it is preferable that the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first display position in pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or after the jackpot announcement in the deciding performance is greater in amount of movement than the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the second initial display position to the second display position in pattern PBY-4 of the preview performance B. By doing this, the recoil action display is larger when it moves downward than when it moves upward, so it is possible to display the movement in a more realistic manner.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are both downward directions, and the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can produce an impactful effect that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
In addition, it is possible to display movement at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or at a plurality of speeds, thereby enabling diversification of the presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the speed of movement of the mounted movable body 32, but the invention is not limited to this, and a comparison may be made between the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the speed of movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison may be made between the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the speed of movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. In other words, as long as the comparison is made between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display and the speed of movement of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 which performs a recoil action of a predetermined amount when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position on the image display device 5, and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed, and the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave an impression on the player.

In the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the first non-mounted movable body M100, but this invention is not limited to this, and a comparison may be made between the recoil action display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the amount of movement of the recoil action of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or a comparison may be made between the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, as long as the comparison is made between the amount of movement of the recoil action display of the pseudo movable body display and the recoil action of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed than when development performance B is executed without execution of development performance A.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of development performance A, which is a movable body performance, and development performance B, which is a pseudo-movable body display performance.
In addition, when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when development performance A is not executed and development performance B is executed, this includes being controlled to a jackpot game state 100% of the time when development performance A and development performance B are executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute a preview performance A which predicts the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will become a jackpot, a development performance B which notifies that it will develop into a strong super reach performance, and a development suggestion performance which suggests the possibility that the development performance B will be executed. In the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific performance display position, and then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then made invisible; in the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific performance display position, and then made invisible without moving and displaying from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position; and when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific performance display position before executing the development performance B and which is displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible, a character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the development suggestion performance, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 being displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and the character image Z310 is hidden without returning from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion of the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding effect which notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and a development effect B which notifies the player that the deciding effect will be executed by developing into a strong super reach effect. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then is made invisible without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51 which suggests the execution of the development effect B can be displayed in a display area including the first specific effect display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then is made invisible.
According to this feature, before the deciding performance is executed, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 prioritizes displaying the suggestive image over moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, and is hidden without returning it from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion of the execution of the deciding performance.On the other hand, during the deciding performance, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.
In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development performance B (specific performance), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding performance (special performance), but this invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to move a pseudo-movable body display that is common to the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position, and can display a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and image Z71A showing multiple glass fragments scatters) in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, The rate at which the display is controlled to a jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) differs between when pattern PBY-3, in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, or pattern PBY-4, in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, is executed, and when patterns PBY-1 or PBY-2, in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position, is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed as moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which have different proportions of being controlled to a jackpot game state, are displayed at different speeds of movement.
In addition, in the preview performance B, when the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or the pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific performance display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the pseudo movable body display Z200 is controlled to the jackpot state (the probability of winning) is different. This includes cases where the rate of being controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed, and the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, and cases where the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 100% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the preview performance B, and the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed.

In addition, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 display images having not only the performance display units Z100A, Z200A but also the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, etc., it is possible to more realistically represent the movable body operated by the drive mechanism and realize a movable body display performance similar to a movable body performance, while with regard to the movement display, it is possible not only to display the movement in a manner similar to the movement of the movable body, but also to display the movement in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body due to reasons such as the mechanism becoming complicated or the cost becoming high, thereby suitably improving the interest of the performance.

Furthermore, in characteristic section 241SG, examples of movement display in a manner that is difficult to achieve with a movable body include high-speed movement, deformed display, and erasing (not displaying) the display without returning from the performance display position to the initial display position. However, by realistically expressing the display manner of the pseudo-movable body display while displaying the movement display unrealistically, it is possible to provide a surprising performance.

In particular, the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position can be made invisible or visible at the desired timing, which has the effect of increasing the freedom of performance design, for example by avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden when the movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance position is returned to the origin position, and making it possible to start the next performance immediately.

In addition, the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. This makes it possible to simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 by using the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the performance position, so the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the mounted movable body 32, and therefore can provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The pseudo-movable body display also includes performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B reach the first performance display position before the performance display units Z100A, Z200A, allowing the pseudo-movable body display to be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the period of movement of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the performance position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the period of movement display of the pseudo movable body display does not include the first period and the second period, so that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

In addition, after the presentation control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first presentation position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby drawing the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the first presentation display position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 does not illuminate the light-emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being displayed moving, thereby making the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed moving less noticeable, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

In addition, after the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby making it possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate presentation display position or the second specific presentation display position, and the downward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific presentation display position in the preview presentation A is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific presentation display position in the preview presentation B. This makes it possible to move and display one pseudo-movable body display from multiple display positions, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

(Variation 1)
Next, a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 16-41. Fig. 16-41 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

As explained in FIG. 16-25, in the characteristic part 241SG, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then erased, and then, as the development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 16-41 (D), when the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap in part, that is, when the mounted movable body 32 that has been moved to the performance position overlaps with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position, if the performance control CPU 120 executes the movement of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position and the movement and display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position during a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it difficult to see the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it easy to see that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is a display body and not a structure, reducing the interest of the performance.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 16-41(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, and then moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 16-41(B)), and then erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 16-41(C)). This avoids the mounted movable body 32, which has moved from the origin position to the performance position as advanced performance A, from overlapping with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, as shown in FIG. 16-41(D).

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 16-42. Fig. 16-42 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, a form has been exemplified in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first performance display position are the same direction (downward), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 moves between the first position and a second position lower than the first position and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 moves and displays between the first display position and the second display position higher than the first display position are the same direction (for example, up and down), it is sufficient that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 401 from the first position to the second position.

In addition, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position (upward) may be different directions.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not executed during a common period, but the invention is not limited to this, and as in this modified example 2, the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 may be executed during a common period, making it possible to execute a performance using the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 16-42, the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 is a structure on which the character "合" is displayed, and is movable between a first position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second position below the first position, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as modified example 2 are movable between a first predetermined position on the left or right side of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 is capable of displaying the character "体" and is movable and displayed between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and descriptions of the drive mechanisms of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are omitted.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned preview performances A and B or development performances A and B, it first waits at the first position as shown in FIG. 16-42(A), displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 at the first display position as shown in FIG. 16-42(B), and then moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position as shown in FIG. 16-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position toward the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 so that it does not overlap with the pseudo movable body display Z402.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is closest to the pseudo movable body display Z402, resulting in a pseudo-combined state in which the word "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-42(F), while maintaining the pseudo-combined state between the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed upward, and further, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the second predetermined position, thereby announcing that the pseudo-combination has been successful and the performance will develop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L, 501R are moved to a first position or a first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided to a first specific display position (e.g., a position on the left or right side) different from the first display position, and then it is erased by framing out to the left or right of the screen or fading out.

On the other hand, if it has been decided to notify that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress, as shown in FIG. 16-42 (D), the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is decelerated and stopped midway through the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the downward movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in a manner in which the upper part is destroyed, thereby notifying that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress. In this way, the pseudo movable body display Z402 can easily realize performances in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 16-43. Fig. 16-43 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved between the first display position and the second display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved back and forth in one direction, such as up and down or left and right. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figures 16-43 (A) and (B), and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figure 16-43 (C).

As shown in FIG. 16-43(C), it is preferable to be able to execute various types of movement displays, such as displaying only the performance display unit Z200A in vertical rotation around a rotation axis facing left and right at the first performance display position, which is a rotational movement display different from a linear movement display facing one direction, or a movement display in a manner that moves in a direction different from the one direction (for example, the depth direction). In this way, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with a movable body.

The characteristic feature 241SG in the embodiment of this invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the invention.

(Explanation of Modifications and Applications)
In the characteristic portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the movable body is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3, and a pseudo-movable body display imitating the frame-side movable body may be made movable and displayable. In addition, as the board-side movable body, a pseudo-movable body display imitating a variable winning device provided in relation to the game may be made displayable.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but were not mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 may be planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but were not mounted.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased, an example is given of a form in which it is made invisible by gradually fading out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image emphasizing that it has been erased may be displayed, or it may be erased by a method other than these.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position is shorter than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and a common effect image Z71 of glass cracking and glass fragments scattering is displayed and a common sound effect is output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, as exemplified above; however, the invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position may be longer than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and different effect images may be displayed and different sound effects may be output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. By doing this, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be emphasized by using the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed a maximum of two times for the development performance A and the deciding performance, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be executed a maximum of two times for the preview performance B and the deciding performance, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed a maximum of four times for the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B, but the invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the movement of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be executed may be executed a number of times other than the above.

Furthermore, if the movable body is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is preferable to allow the pseudo movable body display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. By doing this, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of opportunities for the movable body performance to be performed too much, which would lower the expectation of a jackpot, and instead to prevent a decrease in interest due to fewer performances by increasing the number of opportunities for the pseudo movable body display to be performed.

In addition to the above multiple effects, for example, when the pattern is promoted in the re-draw after the jackpot confirmation notification or during the jackpot, the pseudo-movable body display may be moved, and the pseudo-movable body display that is moved at that time may be a pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

In addition, an example has been given in which a preview effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that control will be made into an advantageous state, a development effect B is applied as a notification effect notifying the player of content that is advantageous to the player, a development suggestion effect is applied as a predetermined effect suggesting that a notification effect will be executed, a decision effect is applied as a special effect notifying that control will be made into an advantageous state, and a preview effect B is applied as a specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed, but this invention is not limited to this, and various other effects besides those mentioned above can be applied. In addition, although these various effects could be executed during the variable display period of one Super Reach, they may also be effects that can be executed across multiple variable display periods.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1, the contents that are advantageous to the player may include variable display results, controls, and effects such as pseudo consecutive wins, big wins, small wins, reach, reserved consecutive wins, chance-up effects, foresight notice effects, misses with time-saving effects, and ceiling time-saving control, which will be described later. In the case of the slot machine, the contents may include chance zone (CZ) wins, assist time (AT) wins, replay time (RT) wins, bonus wins, and the like.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is started, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is lowered or turned off, thereby making the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 stand out, while when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is increased or turned on, thereby diverting the player's attention from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 241SG, it is preferable that while the player is able to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3, the player is not able to adjust the light intensity of the light-emitting display portion Z108A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being impaired or becoming less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible in a development suggestion performance, a form has been exemplified in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as a notification-related image in a display area including the first specific performance display position, but the invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image may be an image other than a character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) as long as it is an image related to the notification performance (for example, development performance B).

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the state it is in when the display starts as a suggestive image that suggests the execution of a deciding performance in the development performance B, but this invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive image may be an image other than a reach title image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach performance or a deciding performance) as long as it suggests the execution of a deciding performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an example is given in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but this invention is not limited to this, and multiple pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, when the movable displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed in the overlapping area, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer closer to the viewer than the other, the viewer can be made aware of the relative positions of the two displays, thereby realizing a more realistic presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, taking into consideration that the mechanism display portions Z100B, Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edges of the display area of the image display device 5, the mounted movable body or a center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover the portion in the display area of the image display device 5 where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins, or the mounted movable body may be moved to make it difficult to see the portion where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the display result of the variable display includes "miss with time reduction", but the CPU 103 may be able to execute ceiling time reduction control, which controls the display to the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state, based on the variable display having been performed a specified number of times (e.g., 900 times) since a specified condition (e.g., performing a clearing process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6, controlling to the jackpot game state, or setting the display result to miss with time reduction) being met. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the specified condition is met, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (e.g., 900 times) may be different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (e.g., 100 times).

When the above-mentioned ceiling time-saving control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without the above-mentioned predetermined condition being met, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. In this way, the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display may be executed in each notification such as a jackpot notification, a time-saving miss notification, and a ceiling time-saving control notification, and the type of pseudo-movable body display and the manner of the moving display may be different in each notification.

In addition, the characteristic portion 241SG has been exemplified as a form in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to notify of a jackpot, but this invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or if the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 may be moved to notify of a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or to notify that the conditions for executing the ceiling time reduction control have been met, while if the variable display result is a jackpot, the mounted movable body 32 may be moved to notify of a jackpot.

Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a common type of pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the manner of the moving display may be different. Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-moving body display may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state after a jackpot game is completed is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this, and it may be a so-called type 1/type 2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small win during the time-saving state after a jackpot game is completed, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of this invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine that can be used for playing games is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but can also be a general gaming machine as long as it is capable of playing games.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 9 ... Game effect lamp 9B1 ... Lever lamp 9B2 ... Button lamp 9C ... Upper frame lamp 9M ... Left frame lamp 9N ... Right frame lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Performance control CPU
131 ... Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A vibration effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
A light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light in response to the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect;
An effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of a game;
A display means,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
The vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect,
The predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect have different aspects,
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
Before the special effect is executed, a special effect different from the special effect can be executed;
The display means is
When a special pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the special performance, the special pseudo-movable object display can be moved and displayed from a special first display position to a special second display position, and then the special pseudo-movable object display can be made invisible without being moved and displayed from the special second display position to the special first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the special second display position;
When the special pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the special pseudo-movable object display can be moved from a special first display position to a special second display position, and then moved from the special second display position to the special first display position, and then hidden;
The predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the specific effect is executed,
The manner of the light emission effect differs between when the predetermined vibration effect is executed and when the special vibration effect is executed,
The vibration state is different when the predetermined vibration performance is executed and when the special vibration performance is executed.
Amusement machine.

Images